TW517043B - Optical fiber manufacture method, preform manufacture method, and preform manufacture apparatus - Google Patents

Optical fiber manufacture method, preform manufacture method, and preform manufacture apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW517043B
TW517043B TW88119203A TW88119203A TW517043B TW 517043 B TW517043 B TW 517043B TW 88119203 A TW88119203 A TW 88119203A TW 88119203 A TW88119203 A TW 88119203A TW 517043 B TW517043 B TW 517043B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
glass rod
extension
heating
diameter
preform
Prior art date
Application number
TW88119203A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Yoshiaki Shimizu
Takaaki Nagano
Tadakatsu Shimada
Hideo Hirasawa
Masataka Watanabe
Original Assignee
Shinetsu Chemical Co
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP31457498A external-priority patent/JP3494905B2/en
Priority claimed from JP31455398A external-priority patent/JP3430038B2/en
Priority claimed from JP10315849A external-priority patent/JP3112893B2/en
Application filed by Shinetsu Chemical Co filed Critical Shinetsu Chemical Co
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TW517043B publication Critical patent/TW517043B/en

Links

Abstract

A method for manufacturing an optical fiber comprises setting a heating condition for heating a glass rod, which is a parent material of the optical fiber, and an elongating speed of the glass rod based on a prescribed numerical value which changes with a progress of elongation of the glass rod; heating and elongating the glass rod to generate a preform based on the heating condition and the elongating speed which are set by the setting; and drawing the preform to a filament-like form by further heating the preform to generate the optical fiber.

Description

517043517043

File:5546piil .doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(I ) 本發明是有關於一種光纖(optical fiber)之製造方法、預 製件(preform)之製造方法及預製件製造裝置,其可製造具有直 徑小量變動之預製件與光纖。^ 第1圖繪示的是傳統一種玻璃基礎材質(glass base material)第一延長(elongating)裝置400的示意圖。玻璃基礎材 質102是光纖爲主之材質,通常是經由玻璃基礎材質第一延 長裝置400延長。此迫使玻璃基礎材質1〇2之直徑產生一'玻 璃竿(glass rod)106。玻璃竿1〇6具有從3mm至5mm之一直 徑,其大於拉出光纖之大多數傳統直徑。大多數用以拉出光 纖之傳統直徑是30mm至80mm。 玻璃基礎材質第一延長裝置400包括一加熱爐管1〇〇用 以加熱玻璃基礎材質102,以及一拉出卡夾(drawing chuck) 104 用以支撐與延長加熱玻璃基礎材質102。爲了延長玻璃基礎材 質102,玻璃基礎材質第一延長裝置400供應玻璃基礎材質 102至加熱爐管100。此處之玻璃基礎材質1〇2被加熱至大約 攝氏2〇〇〇度。第一延長裝置400接著會經由拉出卡夾1〇4支 撐玻璃基礎材質102,並從加熱爐管1〇〇連續向下拉出玻璃基 礎材質102,以形成一^玻璃竿106。 第2圖繪示的是傳統一種玻璃車床110的架構圖。由玻 璃基礎材質第一延長裝置400製造出之玻璃竿1〇6,會經由玻 璃車床110度過二次延長,以產生一預製件1〇7。同時,玻璃 竿106之直徑會縮減至規定直徑。玻璃車床u〇包括卡夾118 與119用以支撐玻璃竿1〇6, 一尾部支撐台U6用以移動卡夾 119,以及一加熱源122用以加熱玻璃竿106。卡夾118之一 4 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) "" """""' ¥ (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) ------^^1 I I I I I I . 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043File: 5546piil.doc A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (I) The present invention relates to a method for manufacturing optical fiber, a method for manufacturing a preform, and a device for manufacturing a preform, which can be manufactured with a small diameter Changing preforms and fibers. ^ Figure 1 shows a schematic diagram of a conventional glass base material first elongating device 400. The glass base material 102 is a fiber-based material, and is usually extended by the glass base material first extension device 400. This forces the diameter of the glass base material 102 to produce a 'glass rod' 106. The glass rod 106 has a diameter from 3 mm to 5 mm, which is larger than most conventional diameters for pulling out optical fibers. Most conventional diameters used to pull out optical fibers are 30mm to 80mm. The glass base material first extension device 400 includes a heating furnace tube 100 for heating the glass base material 102, and a drawing chuck 104 for supporting and extending the heating glass base material 102. In order to extend the glass base material 102, the glass base material first extension device 400 supplies the glass base material 102 to the heating furnace tube 100. Here, the glass base material 102 is heated to about 2000 degrees Celsius. The first extension device 400 then supports the glass base material 102 by pulling out the clip 104, and continuously pulls down the glass base material 102 from the heating furnace tube 100 to form a glass rod 106. FIG. 2 is a structural diagram of a conventional glass lathe 110. The glass rod 106 manufactured by the glass base material first extension device 400 will be extended twice through the glass lathe 110 degrees to produce a prefabricated part 107. At the same time, the diameter of the glass rod 106 is reduced to a prescribed diameter. The glass lathe u〇 includes clips 118 and 119 to support the glass rod 106, a rear support table U6 to move the clip 119, and a heating source 122 to heat the glass rod 106. Card holder one of 118 4 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) " " " " " " " '¥ (Please read the note on the back? Please fill in this page again for matters) ------ ^^ 1 IIIIII. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 517043

File:5546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(;) 側被固疋住,而卡夾118之另一側是可移動的。一牽引力可 被用於卡夾119。由卡夾118與119支撐之玻璃竿1〇6會被加 熱源122加熱◦經由移動尾部支擦台丨16拉玻璃竿1〇6,可延 長此加熱的玻璃竿106。因此,玻璃竿106的直徑會縮減變成 至規定直徑。 當使用傳統玻璃基礎材質第一延長裝置4〇〇來延長玻璃 基礎材質102時,製造出彎曲的玻璃竿1〇6是可能的。此外, 當使用傳統玻璃車床110來延長玻璃竿106以製造預製件107 時,通常會有額外的問題發生◦這些問題包括預製件1〇7之 直徑的變動,此乃因爲在生產每一預製件1〇7時,提供至加 熱源122之氣體數量及移動尾部支撐台U6之速度不同的原 因。 當延長由傳統玻璃基礎材質第一延長裝置4〇0製造出之 _曲的玻璃竿106,並經由玻璃車床11〇製造預製件丨〇7時, 預製件107之直徑會變化。當經由拉出具有變化的直徑之預 製件107來製造光纖時,生產出之光纖的直徑也會變化。如 此將難以製造出高品質的光纖。 因此,本發明的目的,提出一種光纖製造方法,一種 預製件製造方法及一種預製件製造設備,其可解決上述問 題。本發明的目的,可經由結合本發明之申請專利範圍獨 AL項所插述之特徵來達成。此申請專利範圍獨立項定義出 本發明之實施例的額外優點。 依照本發明之第一觀點,提出一種製造光纖的方法, 包括設定一加熱狀況用以加熱一玻璃竿,其爲此光纖之母 5 本紙張尺度適用中國國^票準(CNS)A4規格⑵〇 x 297公釐) ' '" i. 0 ϋ ·ϋ .^1 ϋ 1_1 Βν ^1^^Β^·^ ^1 ^1 ^1 ϋ· ^1 - 4 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043 :ile:5 546pii 1 -doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(彡) 體材質,並依據隨著玻璃竿之延長進行而改變的規定數 値,設定玻璃竿之延長速度;依據此設定情形設定之加熱 狀況與延長速度,加熱與延長玻璃竿以產生一預製件;以 及經由額外加熱預製件來拉出此預製件成一類似細線狀, 以產生一光纖。 提供一種製造光纖的方法,其設定情形依據延長過程 之進行時間做爲此數値,設定加熱狀況與延長速度。此加 熱過程與延長過程可包括一尾端拉出過程,用以縮減玻璃 竿之一端的直徑,以及此尾端拉出過程依據尾端拉出過程 之進行時間,隨著加熱與延長過程尾端拉出玻璃竿之該 丄山 提供一種製造光纖的方法,其設定情形依據延長過程 之進行時間,設定用以加熱玻璃竿之噴燒器的位置以及供 應至噴燒器之氣體數量做爲加熱狀況。此設定情形可依據 延長過程之進行時間,設定用以支撐玻璃竿之卡夾的移動 速度做爲延長速度。 提供一種製造光纖的方法,其設定情形依據在延長過 程中玻璃竿之延長長度做爲數値,設定加熱狀況與延長速 度。 提供一種製造光纖的方法,此加熱過程與延長過程包 括尾端拉出過程,用以縮減玻璃竿之一端的直徑,以及尾 端拉出過程依據玻璃竿之延長長度,隨著加熱與延長過程 尾端拉出玻璃竿之該端。此設定情形可依據玻璃竿之延長 長度,設定用以加熱玻璃竿之噴燒器的移動距離以及供應 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -------^丨訂 w-------- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043File: 5546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 5. Description of the invention (;) The side is fixed and the other side of the card holder 118 is movable. A traction force can be used for the clip 119. The glass rod 106 supported by the clamps 118 and 119 will be heated by the heating source 122. The glass rod 106 can be extended by pulling the glass rod 106 by moving the tail supporter 丨 16. Therefore, the diameter of the glass rod 106 is reduced to a predetermined diameter. When the glass base material 102 is extended using the conventional glass base material first extension device 400, it is possible to manufacture a curved glass rod 106. In addition, when a conventional glass lathe 110 is used to extend the glass rod 106 to make the preform 107, additional problems usually occur. These problems include variations in the diameter of the preform 107, because each preform is produced At 1007 hours, the reasons for the difference in the amount of gas supplied to the heating source 122 and the speed of moving the tail support table U6. When the curved glass rod 106 manufactured by the traditional glass base material first extension device 400 is extended, and the prefabricated part 107 is manufactured through the glass lathe 110, the diameter of the preformed 107 will change. When an optical fiber is manufactured by pulling out a preform 107 having a varying diameter, the diameter of the produced optical fiber also changes. This makes it difficult to manufacture high-quality optical fibers. Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing an optical fiber, a method for manufacturing a preform, and a device for manufacturing a preform, which can solve the foregoing problems. The object of the present invention can be achieved by combining the features interpolated in the separate AL item of the patent application scope of the present invention. This application-scope independent term defines additional advantages of embodiments of the invention. According to a first aspect of the present invention, a method for manufacturing an optical fiber is provided, which includes setting a heating condition to heat a glass rod, which is the mother of the optical fiber. The paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification. x 297 mm) '' " i. 0 ϋ · ϋ. ^ 1 ϋ 1_1 Βν ^ 1 ^^ Β ^ · ^ ^ 1 ^ 1 ^ 1 ϋ · ^ 1-4 (Please read the precautions on the back first (Fill in this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 517043: ile: 5 546pii 1 -doc A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (彡) Body material, and according to the specified number that changes with the extension of glass rod , Set the extension speed of the glass rod; according to the heating conditions and extension speed set in this setting, heat and extend the glass rod to produce a preform; and draw the preform into a similar thin line shape by additional heating of the preform to produce One fiber. A method for manufacturing an optical fiber is provided. The setting situation is determined based on the duration of the extension process, and the heating condition and the extension speed are set. This heating process and extension process may include a tail end drawing process to reduce the diameter of one end of the glass rod, and the tail end drawing process is based on the duration of the tail end drawing process. The Sheshan that pulls out the glass rod provides a method for manufacturing optical fiber. The setting situation is based on the duration of the extension process. The position of the burner to heat the glass rod and the amount of gas supplied to the burner are set as the heating status . This setting can be set as the extension speed based on the duration of the extension process. A method for manufacturing an optical fiber is provided. The setting situation is based on the length of the glass rod during the extension process, and the heating condition and the extension speed are set. A method for manufacturing an optical fiber is provided. The heating process and the extension process include a tail end drawing process to reduce the diameter of one end of the glass rod, and the tail end drawing process is based on the length of the glass rod. Pull out the end of the glass rod. This setting can be based on the extended length of the glass rod, the moving distance of the burner used to heat the glass rod, and the supply of this paper. Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (please read the back first) (Please note this page before filling in this page) ------- ^ 丨 Order w -------- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 517043

File:5546piil .doc A7 B7 A7 五、發明說明(I) r^W 至噴燒器之氣體數量做爲加熱狀況。此設定情形可矣勒參 玻璃竿之延長長度,設定用以支撐玻璃竿之卡夾的释 度做爲延長速度 φ φ 提供一種製造光纖的方法,此設定情形使用/參么 器,其被提供在用以驅動卡夾之馬達上,經由量測廣〆 旋轉角度,量測出卡夾之移動距離。 # _ 提供一種製造光纖的方法,此設定情形依據在_ 程中玻璃竿上產生之張力做爲數値,設定加熱狀況_ 速度 提供一種製造光纖的方法,用以加熱玻璃竿之 源,隨著延長過程進行,沿著玻璃竿之縱向移動,以 熱與延長過程控制延長速度,使得在加熱源移動規洚_ 0 离隹 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 前之張力大體上變成110%或更低在加熱源移動規定_ 後之張力的平均値。 提供一種製造光纖的方法,加熱與延長過程控制# 力,使得在加熱源移動規定距離前之張力大體上變成從 80%至110%在加熱源移動規定距離後之張力的平均値。 此規定距離大體上介於50mm至150mm之間。當加熱 源移動此規定距離時,加熱與延長過程可控制延長速度爲 一定速度。此設定情形依據張力,設定用以支撐玻璃竿之 卡夾的移動速度做爲延長速度。 提供一種製造光纖的方法,此設定情形依據被提供在 介於玻璃竿與任一虛擬竿間之連接上的標記位置做爲數 値’其被銘接至玻璃竿之任一端,設定加熱狀況與延長速 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公f )File: 5546piil.doc A7 B7 A7 V. Description of the Invention (I) The amount of gas from r ^ W to the burner is used as the heating condition. This setting can be used to extend the length of the glass rod, and set the release of the clip used to support the glass rod as an extension speed. Φ Provides a method for manufacturing optical fibers. This setting uses the / reference device, which is provided. On the motor used to drive the clip, the moving distance of the clip is measured by measuring the wide rotation angle. # _ Provide a method for manufacturing optical fiber. This setting is based on the tension generated on the glass rod during the process of _ as the number and set the heating condition. _ Speed Provide a method for manufacturing optical fiber to heat the source of the glass rod. The extension process is carried out, moving along the longitudinal direction of the glass rod, and controlling the extension speed with the heat and extension process, so that the tension before the printing of the heating source movement regulation _______ Li Zhi, Bureau of Intellectual Property of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, and the consumer co-operative cooperative will generally become 110%. Or lower than the average of the tension after the heating source moves _. A method for manufacturing an optical fiber is provided. The heating and elongation process control force is such that the tension before the heating source moves a predetermined distance generally becomes an average tension from 80% to 110% after the heating source moves a predetermined distance. This prescribed distance is generally between 50 mm and 150 mm. When the heating source moves this specified distance, the heating and extension process can control the extension speed to a certain speed. This setting depends on the tension, and the speed of the clamp used to support the glass rod is set as the extension speed. Provide a method for manufacturing optical fiber. The setting situation is based on the position of the mark provided on the connection between the glass rod and any virtual rod as a number. It is affixed to either end of the glass rod to set the heating condition and The paper size of the extended speed paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 male f)

517043 rile:5546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(f ) 度。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 提供一種製造光纖的方法,加熱過程與延長過程包括 一尾端拉出過程,用以縮減玻璃竿之一端的直徑,以及尾 端拉出過程依據標記位置,隨著加熱與延長過程尾端拉出 玻璃竿之該端。此設定情形可依據被提供在介於玻璃竿與 任一虛擬竿間之連接上的切口位置做爲標記位置,設定加 熱狀況與延長速度。 提供一種製造光纖的方法,此設定情形依據被提供在 介於玻璃竿與任一虛擬竿間之連接上的螢光塗料位置做爲 標記位置,設定加熱狀況與延長速度。 提供一種製造光纖的方法,此設定情形依據沿著玻璃 竿之軸方向之複數個位置中的直徑做爲數値,設定沿著玻 璃竿之軸方向之複數個位置中的延長速度,以及依據玻璃 竿之複數個位置中之直徑的平均値,設定加熱狀況。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 提供一種製造光纖的方法,被尾端拉出之玻璃竿的一 端,其直徑被縮減,而此設定情形爲依據沿著玻璃竿之軸 方向之複數個位置中之直徑,以及經由延長過程沿著玻璃 竿之軸方向之玻璃竿的長度變化做爲數値,偵測被尾端拉 出之玻璃竿之尾端拉出區域的位置,以及依據尾端拉出區 域之位置,設定經由火焰硏磨之玻璃竿的硏磨範圍,並依 據尾端拉出區域之直徑,設定火焰之加熱功率狀況,以及 加熱與延長過程經由加熱功率狀況之火焰,硏磨玻璃竿之 硏磨範圍。 依照本發明之另一觀點,提出一種製造光纖的方法, 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 517043 F i 1 e : 5 5 4 6 p i i 1 . d 〇 c 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五1¾¾¾^長-麵竿,朗麵之s髓質,以產生 一預製件;額外加熱預製件來拉出預製件成一類似細線 狀’以產生一光纖;以及’此加熱與延長過程具有預加熱 玻璃竿直到玻璃竿之規定區域軟化爲止,以及尾端拉出規 定區域,用以縮減規定區域之直徑,並用以經由額外加熱 與延長規定區域,製作玻璃竿之一端。 提供一種製造光纖的方法,尾端拉出過程更包括第二 加熱過程,用以經由火焰加熱一區域,比起規定區域之中 心,其大多朝著玻璃竿之中間面的方向,火焰之濃度小於 預加熱過程之火焰的濃度。 依照本發明之第一觀點,一種製造預製件的方法,其 爲光纖之母體材質,包括設定一加熱狀況用以加熱玻璃 竿,其爲光纖之母體材質,並依據隨著玻璃竿之延長進行 而改變的規定數値’設定玻璃竿之延長速度,以及依據此 設定情形設定之加熱狀況與延長速度,加熱與延長玻璃竿 以產生一預製件。 提供一種製造預製件的方法,此設定情形依據延長過 程之進行時間做爲數値,設定加熱狀況與延長速度。 提供一種製造預製件的方法,加熱過程與延長過程包 括一尾端拉出過程,用以縮減玻璃竿之一端的直徑,以及 尾端拉出過程依據尾端拉出過程之進行時間,隨著加熱與 延長過程尾5而拉出玻璃竿之該端。此設定情形依據在延長 過程中玻璃竿之延長長度做爲數値,設定加熱狀況與延長 速度。加熱過程與延長過程更包括一尾端拉出過程,用以 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) \ ------------------^—訂、-------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 517043517043 rile: 5546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 5. Description of the invention (f) degree. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Provide a method for manufacturing optical fiber. The heating process and extension process include a tail end drawing process to reduce the diameter of one end of the glass rod and the basis for the tail end drawing process. Mark the position and pull out the end of the glass rod with the end of the heating and extension process. This setting can be based on the position of the cut provided on the connection between the glass rod and any of the virtual rods as the mark position to set the heating condition and the extension speed. A method for manufacturing optical fiber is provided, and the setting situation is based on the position of the fluorescent paint provided on the connection between the glass rod and any virtual rod as a mark position, and the heating condition and the extension speed are set. A method for manufacturing an optical fiber is provided. The setting situation is based on the diameter in a plurality of positions along the axis of the glass rod as a number, the extension speed in the plurality of positions along the axis of the glass rod is set, and according to the glass. The average diameter of the diameters in the plural positions of the poles sets the heating condition. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs to provide a method for manufacturing optical fibers. The diameter of one end of a glass rod pulled out by the tail end is reduced, and this setting is based on a plurality of positions along the axis of the glass rod. The diameter of the glass rod, and the length change of the glass rod along the axis direction of the glass rod through the extension process are used as a number to detect the position of the region where the tail end of the glass rod pulled out by the tail end is drawn, and The position of the exit area is to set the honing range of the glass rod honing through the flame, and to set the heating power status of the flame according to the diameter of the pull-out area at the tail end, and honing the glass through the flame of the heating power status during the heating and extending process. Honing range of poles. According to another aspect of the present invention, a method for manufacturing optical fiber is proposed. The paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 517043 F i 1 e: 5 5 4 6 pii 1. .d oc The Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs printed A7 B7 5 1¾¾¾ ^^ long-face rod, long surface medulla to produce a preform; additional heating of the preform to pull the preform into a similar thin line shape ' Optical fiber; and 'this heating and extending process has preheating the glass rod until the specified area of the glass rod is softened, and the tail end is pulled out of the specified area to reduce the diameter of the specified area, and is used for additional heating and extension of the specified area to make One end of a glass rod. A method for manufacturing an optical fiber is provided. The tail-end drawing process further includes a second heating process for heating an area through a flame. Compared with a center of a prescribed area, most of the areas are directed toward the middle surface of a glass rod. The flame concentration is less than The flame concentration of the preheating process. According to a first aspect of the present invention, a method for manufacturing a preform, which is a matrix material of an optical fiber, includes setting a heating condition for heating a glass rod, which is a matrix material of an optical fiber, and according to the progress of the extension of the glass rod. Change the specified number: 'Set the extension speed of the glass rod, and the heating condition and extension speed set according to this setting situation, heat and extend the glass rod to produce a preform. A method for manufacturing a prefabricated part is provided. The setting situation is based on the duration of the extension process as a number, and the heating condition and the extension speed are set. A method for manufacturing a preform is provided. The heating process and the extension process include a tail end drawing process to reduce the diameter of one end of the glass rod, and the tail end drawing process is based on the duration of the tail end drawing process. Pull the end of the glass rod with the end 5 of the extension process. This setting is based on the length of the glass rod extension during the extension process, and sets the heating condition and extension speed. The heating process and extension process also include a tail-end pull-out process, which is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) for this paper size. \ -------------- ---- ^ — Order, -------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 517043

File:5546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(q) 縮減玻璃竿之一端的直徑,以及尾端拉出過程依據玻璃竿 之延長長度,隨著加熱與延長過程尾端拉出玻璃竿之該 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 丄山 _〇 提供一種製造預製件的方法,此設定情形依據在延長 過程中玻璃竿上產生之張力做爲數値,設定加熱狀況與延 長速度。 提供一種製造預製件的方法,用以加熱玻璃竿之加熱 源,隨著延長過程進行,沿著玻璃竿之縱向移動,以及加 熱與延長過程控制延長速度,使得在加熱源移動規定距離 前之張力大體上變成110%或更低在加熱源移動規定距離 後之張力的平均値。 提供一種製造預製件的方法,加熱與延長過程控制張 力,使得在加熱源移動規定距離前之張力大體上變成從 80%至110%在加熱源移動規定距離後之張力的平均値。此 規定距離大體上介於50mm至150mm之間。當加熱源移動規 定距離時,加熱與延長過程控制延長速度爲一定速度。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 提供一種製造預製件的方法,此設定情形依據被提供 在介於玻璃竿與任一虛擬竿間之連接上的標記位置做爲數 値,其被鎔接至玻璃竿之任一端,設定加熱狀況與延長速 度。加熱過程與延長過程可包括一尾端拉出過程,用以縮 減玻璃竿之一端的直徑,以及尾端拉出過程依據標記位 置,隨著加熱與延長過程尾端拉出玻璃竿之該端。 提供一種製造預製件的方法,此設定情形依據沿著玻 璃竿之軸方向之複數個位置中的直徑做爲數値,設定沿著 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 517043File: 5546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (q) Reduce the diameter of one end of the glass rod, and the process of pulling out the tail end according to the length of the glass rod. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 丄 山 _〇 Provides a method for manufacturing prefabricated parts. This setting is based on the tension generated on the glass rod during the extension process as a number, and sets the heating status and extension speed. . Provided is a method for manufacturing a preform, which is used to heat a heating source of a glass rod, and move along the longitudinal direction of the glass rod as the elongation process proceeds, and control the elongation speed during the heating and elongation process, so that the tension before the heating source moves a predetermined distance Roughly 110% or less becomes the average tension of the tension after the heating source moves a predetermined distance. A method for manufacturing a preform is provided, in which the tension is controlled during heating and elongation, so that the tension before the heating source moves a predetermined distance generally becomes an average tension from 80% to 110% after the heating source moves a predetermined distance. This prescribed distance is generally between 50mm and 150mm. When the heating source moves a specified distance, the heating and extension process controls the extension speed to a certain speed. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs to provide a method for manufacturing prefabricated parts. This setting is based on the position of the marker provided on the connection between the glass rod and any virtual rod, which is connected. Go to either end of the glass rod and set the heating condition and extension speed. The heating process and extension process may include a tail-end drawing process to reduce the diameter of one end of the glass rod, and the tail-end drawing process according to the marked position, with the heating and extending process, the tail end of the glass rod is pulled out of the end of the glass rod. Provide a method for manufacturing prefabricated parts. The setting situation is based on the diameter of a plurality of positions along the axis of the glass rod as the number. The setting of this paper applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297). Mm) 517043

File:5546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(¾ ) 玻璃竿之軸方向之複數個位置中的延長速度,以及依據玻 璃竿之複數個位置中之直徑的平均値,設定加熱狀況。 提供一種製造預製件的方法,被尾端拉出之玻璃竿的 一端,其直徑被縮減,而此設定情形爲依據沿著玻璃竿之 軸方向之複數個位置中之直徑,以及經由延長過程沿著玻 璃竿之軸方向之玻璃竿的長度變化做爲數値,偵測被尾端 拉出之玻璃竿之尾端拉出區域的位置,以及依據尾端拉出 區域之位置,設定經由火焰硏磨之玻璃竿的硏磨範圍,並 依據尾端拉出區域之直徑,設定火焰之加熱功率狀況,以 及加熱與延長過程經由加熱功率狀況之火焰,硏磨玻璃竿 之硏磨範圍。 依照本發明之另一觀點,提出一種製造預製件的方 法,其爲光纖之母體材質,包括預加熱玻璃竿直到該璃竿 之規定區域軟化爲止,以及尾端拉出此規定區域,用以縮 減規定區域之直徑,並用以經由額外加熱與延長規定區 域’製作玻璃千之一^而。此尾端拉出過程更包括第二加熱 過程,用以經由火焰加熱一區域,比起規定區域之中心, 其大多朝著玻璃竿之中間面的方向,火焰之濃度小於預加 熱過程之火焰的濃度。 依照本發明之第一觀點,一種製造預製件的裝置,其 爲光纖之母體材質,包括一加熱源,用以加熱一玻璃竿, 其爲預製件之母體材質;一延長單元,用以延長玻璃竿; 一量測裝置,用以量測隨著玻璃竿之延長進行而改變之數 値;以及一控制單元,用以依據經由量測裝置量測到之數 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) -IV. (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) ------卜訂、--------線% 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043File: 5546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (¾) The extension speed in the multiple positions of the glass rod in the axial direction, and the heating condition is set based on the average diameter of the diameters in the multiple positions of the glass rod. To provide a method for manufacturing a preform, the diameter of one end of a glass rod pulled out by a tail end is reduced, and the setting situation is based on the diameter in a plurality of positions along the axis of the glass rod, and along the extension process The length change of the glass rod in the direction of the axis of the glass rod is taken as a number. The position of the region of the tail end of the glass rod pulled out by the tail end is detected, and the position of the region of the end of the glass rod is set to pass through the flame. The honing range of the glass rod is set according to the diameter of the region pulled out at the end, and the heating power status of the flame is set, and the honing range of the glass rod is honed by the flame during the heating and extending process. According to another aspect of the present invention, a method for manufacturing a preform is provided, which is a mother material of an optical fiber, including preheating a glass rod until a specified area of the glass rod is softened, and pulling out the specified area at a tail end to reduce The diameter of the specified area is used to make one thousandth of the glass through additional heating and extension of the specified area. This process of pulling out the tail end further includes a second heating process for heating an area through the flame. Compared with the center of the prescribed area, most of it is directed toward the middle surface of the glass rod. The flame concentration is less than that of the flame during the preheating process. concentration. According to a first aspect of the present invention, a device for manufacturing a preform, which is a mother material of an optical fiber, includes a heating source for heating a glass rod, which is a mother material of the preform; an extension unit for extending glass A rod; a measuring device for measuring the number that changes with the extension of the glass rod; and a control unit for applying the Chinese national standard (CNS) based on the number of paper sizes measured by the measuring device ) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) -IV. (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) ------ Buddy, -------- line% Intellectual Property of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Bureau's Consumer Cooperatives 517043

File:5546piil .doc A7 發明說明(1) 値,控制加熱源之加熱狀況與延長單元之延長速押 提供 製造預製件的赌,麵贿_域長過程 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 之進行時間做爲數値,以及控制單元依據經由 測到之延_程之赌關,控刪 提供—種製造預製件的裝置,量測裝置量阜 進行而改變之延長單元之移_離做_値,以 兀依據經_測類量翻之延鮮元之鶴二= 加熱狀況與延長速度。 離,拴制 過程造翻㈣赌,量灘難_由延長 由量測生之動做_値,以及控_元依據經 與延長之魏竿上產生之張力,_加熱狀況 /一、、/1供一種製造預製件的裝置,加熱源隨著延長過程進 行^^者玻璃竿之縱向移動,以及控制單元控制延長速度, 使#在加熱源移動規定距離前之張力大體上變成110%或 更低在加熱源移動規定距離後之張力的平均値。 η 提1 共一種製造預製件的裝置,控制單元控制張力,使 ί守在加j源移動規疋距離則之張力大體上變成從8〇%至 U0%在加熱源移動規定距離後之張力的平均値。此規定距 =大體上介於之間。當加熱源移動規定距離 時’控制單元可控制延長速度爲一定速度。 供一種製造預製件的裝置,量測裝置量測被提供在 介於玻璃竿與任一虛擬竿間之連接上的標記位置做爲數 値’其被籍接至玻璃竿之任一端,以及控制單元依據經由 測裝置量 12 本紙張尺«时_ :格⑽公复/· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)File: 5546piil.doc A7 Explanation of the invention (1) 値, control the heating condition of the heating source and the extension of the extension unit to provide pre-fabricated bets, face bribes_Printed by the Employees' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and the Ministry of Economic Affairs The execution time is counted, and the control unit provides a kind of device for manufacturing prefabricated parts according to the measured delay. The extension of the extension unit is changed by the measurement device. Alas, Yan Eryuan's Crane II, which turns over based on the amount of classics _ measurement type = heating condition and extension speed. The process of disengagement and tethering creates a gambling problem, and it is difficult to measure the beach. _ Extending by measuring the movement of students _ 値, and controlling _ Yuan based on the tension generated on the Wei and Jing Yan poles, _ heating conditions / 一 、、 / 1 For a device for manufacturing prefabricated parts, the heating source moves longitudinally of the glass rod along with the extension process, and the control unit controls the extension speed, so that the tension of # before the heating source moves a predetermined distance generally becomes 110% or more Low average 値 of tension after the heating source has moved a predetermined distance. η mention 1 There is a device for manufacturing prefabricated parts. The control unit controls the tension, so that the tension at the distance of the moving distance of the source is generally changed from 80% to U0% after the heating source moves a predetermined distance. Average 値. This specified distance = is roughly between. When the heating source moves a predetermined distance, the control unit can control the extension speed to a certain speed. Provided is a device for manufacturing a prefabricated part. A measuring device measures a marked position provided on a connection between a glass rod and any virtual rod as a data frame, which is connected to either end of the glass rod, and controls The unit is based on a measuring device measuring 12 paper rulers «Hour_: Grid Copier / · (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

517043517043

File:5546pii 1 .dc 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(丨(?) 量測裝置量測到之標記位置,控制加熱狀況與延長速度。 提供一種製造預製件的裝置,量測裝置量測沿著5皮_ 竿之軸方向之複數個位置中的直徑做爲數値,以及控制胃 元依據沿著玻璃竿之軸方向之複數個位置中之直徑,控_ 沿著玻璃竿之軸方向之複數個位置中之延長速度,以及@ · 據複數個位置中之直徑的平均値,控制加熱狀況。 爲讓本發明之上述和其他目的、特徵、和優點能更明 顯易懂,下文特舉較佳實施例,並配合所附圖式,作詳細 說明如下: 圖式之簡單說明: 第1圖繪示的是傳統一種玻璃基礎材質第一延長裝置 400的示意圖; 第2圖繪不的是傳統一種玻璃車床110的架構圖; 第3圖繪示的是本發明之光纖製造裝置的系統圖; 第4圖繪示的是本發明之光纖製造方法的流程圖; 第5圖繪示的是玻璃基礎材質第一延長裝置9〇〇的架構 圖; 第6圖繪示的是第一延長裝置4〇2的架構圖,其經由一 基礎材質固定單元Π6支撐一標準竿us,以調整用以延長玻 璃基礎材質102之軸線; 第7圖繪示的是第4圖之玻璃基礎材質第一延長過程 (S204)的詳細流程圖; 第8圖繪示的是第一延長裝置4〇2的架構圖,其經由延 長卡夾I42支撐標準竿138 ; 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公釐) {請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁}File: 5546pii 1 .dc Printed A7 B7 by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (丨 (?) Marking position measured by the measuring device to control the heating status and extend the speed. Device, measuring device measures the diameter in a plurality of positions along the axis of the 5-bar _ rod as a number, and controls the gastric element based on the diameter in a plurality of positions along the axis of the glass rod, and controls _ The elongation speed in a plurality of positions along the axis of the glass rod and @ · The heating condition is controlled based on the average diameter of the diameters in the plurality of positions. In order to make the above and other objects, features, and advantages of the present invention more Obviously easy to understand, the following describes in detail the preferred embodiment and the accompanying drawings, as follows: Brief description of the drawings: Figure 1 shows a schematic diagram of a first extension device 400 of a traditional glass base material; FIG. 2 does not show the architecture diagram of a conventional glass lathe 110; FIG. 3 shows the system diagram of the optical fiber manufacturing apparatus of the present invention; FIG. 4 shows the optical fiber manufacturing method of the present invention Flow chart; Figure 5 shows the architecture of the first extension device 900 of the basic glass material; Figure 6 shows the architecture of the first extension device 402, which passes through a basic material fixing unit Π6 Support a standard rod us to adjust the axis used to extend the glass base material 102; FIG. 7 shows a detailed flowchart of the first extension process (S204) of the glass base material in FIG. 4; FIG. 8 shows It is the architecture diagram of the first extension device 402, which supports the standard bar 138 via the extension clip I42; This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇X 297 mm) {Please read the note on the back first Matters refill this page}

517043517043

File:5546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(II) 第9圖繪示的是第一延長裝置402的架構圖,其經由懸 吊機制I34與延長機制14〇支撐標準竿138 ; (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 第10圖繪示的是使用延長滾輪14知與14仆取代延長機 制M0上之延長卡夾I42的範例圖; 第11圖繪示的是使用延長滾輪144a與144b取代延長機‘ 制14〇上之延長卡夾I42的範例圖; 第I2圖繪不的是玻璃基礎材質1〇2的示意圖,其彎曲度 被量測; 桌13圖繪不的是經由弟一延長裝置402控制延長滾輪 M4a與14仆之旋轉速度的機構圖; 第14圖繪示的是介於玻璃基礎材質ι〇2之熱軟化區域之 中心位置與延長軸線I54間之偏差數與玻璃竿1〇6之彎曲度 間的關係圖; 第15圖繪示的是延長滾輪;i44a與l44b之表面的變形 圖, 第16圖繪示的是當金屬管係由第15圖之批數3〇〇之延 長滾輪144a與144b負載時,金屬管的變位圖; 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 第Π圖繪示的是經由實施例中之第一延長裝置4〇2,熱 軟化區域之中心位置的變位圖; 第18圖繪示的是當延長滾輪丨44a與144b之旋轉速度被 控制在相同旋轉速度時,熱軟化區域之中心位置的變動圖; 第19圖繪示的是用於第5圖之玻璃竿融化裝置37〇之噴 燒器(burner)176的另一實施例; 第2〇圖繪示的是玻璃竿輸送裝置380的架構圖; 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210x297公釐了 517043 F i 1 e : 5 5 4 6 p i i 1 . d 〇 c A7 B7 五 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 發明說明(μ ) 第21圖繪示的是第一延長裝置402之儲存容器224的示 意圖; (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 第22圖繪不的是當輸送玻璃竿106時,玻璃竿輸送裝置 3 8 0的移動圖; 第23圖繪示的是玻璃竿輸送裝置380的另一實施例; 第24圖繪示的是當玻璃竿輸送裝置380輸送玻璃竿106 時,第23圖之玻璃竿輸送裝置380的移動圖; 第25圖繪示的是本發明之玻璃竿第二延長裝置111的架 構圖; 第26圖繪示的是第4圖之玻璃竿第二延長過程(S206)的 詳細流程圖; 第27圖繪示的是提供在固定卡夾118上之冷卻裝置330 與玻璃竿第二延長裝置111之可移動卡夾119的範例圖; 第28圖繪示的是範例與比較的範例之固定卡夾118與可 移動卡夾11.9的温度圖; 第29圖繪示的是介於加熱源122與直徑量測裝置124間 距離與玻璃竿106之直徑變動百分比間的關係圖; 第30圖繪示的是玻璃竿第二延長裝置111的架構圖,其 具有一張力量測裝置282 ; 第31圖繪示的是第26圖之延長過程(S154)的詳細流程 圖; 第32圖繪示的是在玻璃竿106之延長期間,直徑變動的 過程圖; 第33圖繪示的是依照第31圖之延長過程(S154),玻璃 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 517043File: 5546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (II) Figure 9 shows the architecture diagram of the first extension device 402, which supports the standard bar 138 via the suspension mechanism I34 and the extension mechanism 14; (please first (Please read the notes on the back and fill in this page) Figure 10 shows an example of using the extension roller 14 to replace the extension clip I42 on the extension mechanism M0; Figure 11 shows the use of the extension roller 144a The example of the extension clip I42 on the system 140 with 144b instead of the extension machine; Figure I2 can't draw a schematic diagram of the glass base material 102, and its curvature is measured; Table 13 can't draw through The first extension device 402 controls the rotation speed of the extension rollers M4a and 14; Figure 14 shows the deviation between the center position of the heat-softened area of the glass base material ι〇2 and the extension axis I54. The relationship between the curvature of the glass rod 106; Figure 15 shows the extension roller; the deformation of the surface of i44a and l44b; Figure 16 shows the number of times when the metal pipe system is changed from Figure 15 The displacement diagram of the metal tube when the extended rollers 144a and 144b are loaded by 300; Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Figure Π shows the dislocation map of the central position of the heat-softened area via the first extension device 402 in the embodiment. Figure 18 shows when the extension The change of the center position of the heat-softened area when the rotation speed of the rollers 44a and 144b are controlled at the same rotation speed; Figure 19 shows the burner (37) for the glass rod melting device 37 of Figure 5 ( burner) 176 another embodiment; FIG. 20 shows a structural diagram of a glass rod conveying device 380; this paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210x297 mm 517043 F i 1 e: 5 5 4 6 pii 1. D occ A7 B7 The invention description (μ) printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (Figure 5) Figure 21 shows the schematic diagram of the storage container 224 of the first extension device 402; (Please read first Note on the back, please fill in this page again.) Figure 22 cannot depict the movement of the glass rod conveying device 380 when the glass rod 106 is conveyed. Figure 23 shows another implementation of the glass rod conveying device 380. Example; Figure 24 shows when the glass rod loses When the feeding device 380 conveys the glass rod 106, the movement diagram of the glass rod conveying device 380 in FIG. 23 is shown in FIG. 25; FIG. 25 shows the structural diagram of the second extension device 111 of the glass rod of the present invention; The detailed flow chart of the second extension process (S206) of the glass rod in FIG. 4; FIG. 27 shows the cooling device 330 provided on the fixed clip 118 and the movable clip 119 of the second extension device 111 of the glass rod Figure 28 shows the temperature map of the fixed clip 118 and the movable clip 11.9 of the example and the comparative example; Figure 29 shows the temperature between the heating source 122 and the diameter measuring device 124 The relationship between the distance and the percentage change in the diameter of the glass rod 106; Figure 30 shows the structure of the glass rod second extension device 111, which has a force measuring device 282; Figure 31 shows the 26th Fig. 32 is a detailed flowchart of the extension process (S154); Fig. 32 shows the process of diameter change during the extension of the glass rod 106; Fig. 33 shows the extension process according to Fig. 31 (S154) The paper size of glass is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (21 0 X 297 mm) 517043

File:5 546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(丨}) 竿10 6被延長的過程圖; (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 第34圖繪示的是在範例之早期延長階段,玻璃竿106之 張力的變動圖; 第35圖繪示的是在比較的範例之早期延長階段,玻璃竿 106之張力的變動圖; 第36圖繪不的是在玻璃竿106之延長之後’玻璃竿106 之直徑的變動圖; 第37圖繪示的是第26圖之尾端拉出過程(S158)的詳細 流程圖; 第38圖繪示的是切口 284的示意圖,其在第37圖之尾 端拉出位置偵測過程(S169),被提供在介於玻璃竿106與虛擬 竿108間之連接上; 第39圖繪示的是印記287的示意圖,其被用在介於玻璃 竿106與虛擬竿108間之連接上,以做爲標記之另一範例; 第40圖繪示的是在尾端拉出位置偵測過程(S169)中偵測 切口 284之玻璃竿第二延長裝置111的示意圖; 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 第41圖繪7^的是在第37圖所不流程圖之玻璃竿106之 尾端拉出過程期間,加熱源122與尾部支撐台116的移動圖; 第42圖繪示的是在第37圖之尾端拉出過程(S158)中, 尾ί而拉出過程之另一^方法的設定範例; 第43圖繪示的是在第37圖之尾端拉出過程(S158)中, 尾端拉出過程之另一^方法的另一^設定範例; 第44圖繪示的是玻璃竿第二延長裝置in之加熱源122 的架構圖; 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 517043File: 5 546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (丨}) The process drawing of the pole 10 6 being extended; (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Figure 34 shows the early stage of the example The tension change of the glass rod 106 during the extension phase; Figure 35 shows the tension change of the glass rod 106 during the early extension phase of the comparative example; Figure 36 does not show the extension of the glass rod 106 After that, the diameter of the glass rod 106 is changed; FIG. 37 shows a detailed flowchart of the drawing-out process (S158) at the end of FIG. 26; FIG. 38 shows a schematic view of the cutout 284, which is shown at The drawing position detection process (S169) at the end of Figure 37 is provided on the connection between the glass rod 106 and the virtual rod 108; Figure 39 shows a schematic diagram of the mark 287, which is used between The connection between the glass rod 106 and the virtual rod 108 is used as another example of the mark; FIG. 40 shows the second detection of the cutout 284 of the glass rod in the position detection process (S169) at the tail end. Schematic diagram of extension device 111; Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Figure 41 and 7 ^ During the drawing process of the tail end of the glass rod 106 not shown in the flowchart in FIG. 37, the heating source 122 and the tail support platform 116 are moved. FIG. 42 shows the drawing process at the tail end of FIG. 37. In (S158), another example of the setting method of the tail-pulling process is shown in FIG. 43. FIG. 43 shows another process of the tail-pulling process in FIG. 37 (S158). ^ Another ^ setting example of the method; Figure 44 shows the structure diagram of the heating source 122 of the second extension device of the glass rod in; This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 517043

File:5546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(γ ) 第45圖繪示的是加熱源122之頂部的平面圖;_ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 第46圖繪示的是介於氧氣之直線速度與加熱源122之頂 部溫度間的關係圖; 第47圖繪示的是預製件107之尖端的形狀圖,其直徑在 尾端拉出過程(S158)中被縮減及融化; 第⑽圖繪示的是預製件107之尖端的另一形狀圖,其尾 端被延長; 第49圖繪示的是在第26圖之表面處理過程(S168)中之 預製件107被表面處理前,預製件107的損害圖; 第5〇圖繪示的是預製件l〇7a的示意圖,其係經由氫氟 酸蝕刻第51圖與第52圖所示範例之處理; 第51圖繪示的是經由視覺檢查計數範例與比較的範例 之預製件107上產生之氟化氫凹面的數量; 第52圖繪示的是在範例與比較的範例之氫氟酸触刻的 處理之後,預製件107之不均勻表面; 第53圖繪示的是經表面處理之預製件107的另一形狀; 第54圖繪示的是用以淸洗加熱源之超音波淸洗裝置4〇4 的不意圖;以及 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 第55圖繪示的是用以延長預製件107來製造光纖之預_ 件拉出裝置500的架構圖。 圖式之標號說明: 10〇 :加熱爐管 1〇2 :玻璃基礎材質 104 :拉出卡夾 106 :玻璃竿 107、107a、107b :預製件 108、342 :虛擬竿 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 517043File: 5546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (γ) Figure 45 shows a plan view of the top of the heating source 122; _ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Figure 46 shows It is the relationship between the linear velocity of oxygen and the top temperature of the heating source 122. Figure 47 shows the shape of the tip of the preform 107, and its diameter is reduced and reduced during the tail end drawing process (S158). Melting; Figure ⑽ shows another shape of the tip of the preform 107, whose tail is extended; Figure 49 shows the preform 107 in the surface treatment process (S168) of Figure 26. The damage map of the preform 107 before surface treatment; Figure 50 shows a schematic diagram of the preform 107a, which is treated by the example shown in Figure 51 and Figure 52 through hydrofluoric acid etching; Figure 51 The number of the hydrogen fluoride concaves on the preform 107 of the example and the comparative example is counted by visual inspection. Figure 52 shows the preform after the hydrofluoric acid etching process of the example and the comparative example. 107 uneven surface; Figure 53 shows the surface prefabricated The other shape of 107; Figure 54 shows the unintentional use of ultrasonic washing device 4 for washing the heating source; and Figure 55 shows the printing by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. A structural diagram of a preform pull-out device 500 for extending the preform 107 to manufacture an optical fiber. Description of the symbols of the drawings: 100: heating furnace tube 102: glass base material 104: pull-out clip 106: glass rods 107, 107a, 107b: preform 108, 342: virtual rod This paper size applies Chinese national standards (CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) 517043

File:5 546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(β) 110 :玻璃車床 玻璃竿第二延長裝置 112 :托台 116 :尾部支撐台 118、119、346 :卡夾 移動支架 122 :加熱源 直徑量測裝置 130 :延長溶爐 懸吊機制 136 :基礎材質固定單兀 標準竿 140 :延長機制 延長卡夾 144a、144b :延長滾輪 149 :軸承 150 :量測裝置 直徑量測裝置 154 :延長軸線 直徑控制單元 158 :位置控制單元 噴燒器 178 :火焰 氫氣供應管 192 :氧氣供應管 環形氣體入口 196 :冷卻水 冷卻水供應管 200 :冷卻水排出管 給料器 206 :延長裝置 支撐腳 210 :旋轉台 馬達 214 :定時輸送帶 噴燒器架 218 :延長融解卡夾 儲存容器 、234b、236a、236b : 支撐元件 汽缸儲存盒 245 :可移動的支撐元件 固定的支撐元件 248 :操作開關盒 264 :促動器 252 :支撐架 18 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 517043File: 5 546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention Description (β) 110: Glass Lathe Glass Rod Second Extension Device 112: Pallet 116: Tail Support 118, 119, 346 : Clip moving bracket 122: Heating source diameter measuring device 130: Extension furnace suspension mechanism 136: Basic material fixed unit standard rod 140: Extension mechanism extension clip 144a, 144b: Extension roller 149: Bearing 150: Measurement Device diameter measuring device 154: extended axis diameter control unit 158: position control unit burner 178: flame hydrogen supply pipe 192: oxygen supply pipe annular gas inlet 196: cooling water cooling water supply pipe 200: cooling water discharge pipe feeder 206: Extension device support leg 210: Rotary table motor 214: Timing conveyor belt burner holder 218: Extended melting cartridge storage container, 234b, 236a, 236b: Support element cylinder storage box 245: Removable support element fixed support Element 248: Operation switch box 264: Actuator 252: Support frame 18 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Scale applicable Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) 517043

File:5 546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(/f) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 254 :操控器 256、268 :旋轉軸 257、258 :軸釘 260 :托盤 262 :支柱 266 :連結軸 270 :滑行推動器 272 :移動支架編碼器 273 :尾端支撐架驅動編碼器 274 :移動支架馬達 275 :尾端支撐架驅動馬達 276 :鏈條 278 :流量控制器 280 :控制單元 282 :張力量測裝置 284 :切口 285 :外管 286 :內管 287 :螢光塗料 288 :氧氣出口 290 :易燃氣體出口 294 :火焰 296 :惰氣通道 298 :惰氣流率控制單元 300 :閥門 302 :連接元件 304 :控制元件 306 :驅動源 308 :氧氣通道 310 :氧氣流率控制單元 312 :易燃氣體通道 314 :易燃氣體流率控制單元 316 :分支工具 330 :冷卻裝置 332 :融化部分 334 :切割面 336 :逐漸變細部分 338 :薄部分 340 :把手 346 :卡夾 344 :可移動支撐架 348 :加熱裝置 350 :光纖 352 :直徑量測裝置 354 :第一塗佈裝置 356 :第一矯正裝置 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 517043 <ηε:5 546ρϋ 1 .doc五、發明說明(Μ ) 358 :第二塗佈裝置 362 :曳引機 3S〇 :玻璃竿傳輸裝置 392 :氫氣入口管 A7 B7 396 400 402 500 600 超音波震盪器 36〇 :第二矯正裝置 370 :玻璃竿融化裝置 390 :火焰噴嘴 394 :氧氣入口管 398 :淸洗液 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 900 ·玻璃基礎材質第一延長裝置 第一延長裝置 404 :超音波淸洗裝置 預製件拉出裝置 玻璃基礎材質產生裝置 700 :玻璃基礎材質脫水與燒結裝置 本發明之詳細描沭 本發明將使用實施例解釋說明。然而,以下實施例並不 限制本發明之範圍在申請專利範圍中所描述。此外,對本發 明來說,在實施例中描述之所有特徵或其結合並非是必要 的。 雖然本發明已以較佳實施例揭露出,然本發明之範圍 並不限定在這些實施例中。任何熟習此技藝者,皆可對本 發明之實施例作各種修正與改善。此種對本發明之申請專 利範圍添加的修正或改善,也在本發明之保護範圍內。 第3圖繪示的是本發明之光纖製造裝置的系統圖。本發 明之光纖製造裝置的系統包括一玻璃基礎材質產生裝置 600,用以產生一玻璃基礎材質102做爲光纖之基礎材質;一 玻璃基礎材質脫水(dehydrating)與燒結(sintering)裝置700,用 以脫水與燒結玻璃基礎材質102 ; —玻璃基礎材質第一延長裝 20 (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) --------tT---------線秦 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 517043File: 5 546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (/ f) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 254: Manipulator 256, 268: Rotary shaft 257, 258: Shaft nail 260: Tray 262: Pillar 266 : Coupling shaft 270: Sliding pusher 272: Moving bracket encoder 273: End support bracket drive encoder 274: Moving bracket motor 275: End bracket driving motor 276: Chain 278: Flow controller 280: Control unit 282: Tension measurement device 284: Cutout 285: Outer tube 286: Inner tube 287: Fluorescent paint 288: Oxygen outlet 290: Flammable gas outlet 294: Flame 296: Inert gas passage 298: Inert gas flow rate control unit 300: Valve 302: Connection element 304: control element 306: drive source 308: oxygen channel 310: oxygen flow rate control unit 312: flammable gas channel 314: flammable gas flow rate control unit 316: branch tool 330: cooling device 332: melting section 334: Cutting surface 336: Tapered portion 338: Thin portion 340: Handle 346: Clip 344: Movable support 348: Heating device 350: Optical fiber 352: Diameter measuring device 354: First coating device 3 56: First corrective device (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 517043 < ηε: 5 546ρϋ 1 .doc Description of the invention (M) 358: second coating device 362: traction machine 3S0: glass rod transmission device 392: hydrogen inlet pipe A7 B7 396 400 402 500 600 ultrasonic oscillator 36: second correction device 370: glass Rod melting device 390: Flame nozzle 394: Oxygen inlet pipe 398: Washing liquid Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Employee Consumer Cooperatives 900 Printed glass first extension device First extension device 404: Ultrasonic washing device prefab Glass base material generating device 700: Glass base material dewatering and sintering device Detailed description of the present invention The present invention will be explained using embodiments. However, the following examples do not limit the scope of the present invention as described in the patent application scope. In addition, all the features described in the embodiments or a combination thereof are not necessary for the present invention. Although the present invention has been disclosed in the preferred embodiments, the scope of the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. Anyone skilled in the art can make various modifications and improvements to the embodiments of the present invention. Such amendments or improvements to the patentable scope of the present invention are also within the protection scope of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a system diagram of the optical fiber manufacturing apparatus of the present invention. The system of the optical fiber manufacturing device of the present invention includes a glass base material generating device 600 for generating a glass base material 102 as a base material for an optical fiber; a glass base material dehydrating and sintering device 700 for Dehydrated and sintered glass base material 102; —Glass base material first extension 20 (please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) -------- tT --------- line Qin Ben paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 517043

File:5 546pii 1 .dc 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明((¾) 置900 ’用以延長玻璃基礎材質1〇2,以產生一玻璃竿1〇6 ; 一玻璃竿傳輸裝置380,用以傳輸玻璃竿106 ; —玻璃竿第二 延長裝置111,用以延長玻璃竿106 —第二時間,以產生一預 製件107;以及,一預製件拉出裝置500,用以拉出預製件107, 以產生一光纖。 第4圖繪示的是本發明之光纖製造方法的流程圖。經由 玻璃基礎材質產生裝置600使用VAD方法、氣相軸沉積方法 或類似者(S200),產生玻璃基礎材質1〇2。玻璃基礎材質ι〇2 接者會經由玻璃基礎材質脫水與燒結裝置7〇〇(S2〇2)在一氯氣 環境內被脫水,以及在一惰氣環境內被燒結。 玻璃基礎材質1〇2之直徑通常是i10mm至200mm,相較 於直徑爲30mm至80mm來說,其較實用於拉出光纖。因此, 被脫水與燒結的玻璃基礎材質102首先經由玻璃基礎材質第 一延長裝置900來延長,以製造出一玻璃竿1〇6(S2〇4)。玻璃 竿106具有3mm至5mm之直徑,方便於拉出光纖從3〇mm至 80mm 〇 玻璃竿106經由玻璃竿傳輸裝置38〇(S2〇5)傳輸。玻璃竿 106接者會經由玻璃竿第二延長裝置1丨丨來加熱與延長至一規 定直徑,以製造出一預製件1〇7(S206)。預製件107經由預製 件拉出裝置5〇〇來加熱與延長至一類似細線的形式,以製造 出一光纖(S210) ◦ 第5圖繪示的是玻璃基礎材質第一延長裝置9〇〇的架構 圖。玻璃基礎材質第一延長裝置900包括一第一延長裝置4〇2 用以加熱與延長玻璃基礎材質102,以及一玻璃竿融化裝置 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公爱) (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁)File: 5 546pii 1 .dc Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention ((¾) 900 ′ is used to extend the glass base material 102 to produce a glass rod 106; a A glass rod transmission device 380 for transmitting the glass rod 106; a glass rod second extension device 111 for extending the glass rod 106 a second time to produce a preform 107; and a preform pull-out device 500, It is used to pull out the preform 107 to generate an optical fiber. Figure 4 shows a flowchart of the optical fiber manufacturing method of the present invention. The glass-based material generating device 600 uses a VAD method, a vapor axis deposition method, or the like ( S200) to produce a glass base material 102. The glass base material ι〇2 will then be dehydrated in a chlorine gas environment through a glass base material dehydration and sintering device 700 (S200), and in an inert gas environment. The diameter of the glass base material 102 is usually 10 to 200 mm. Compared with the diameter of 30 mm to 80 mm, it is more practical for pulling out optical fibers. Therefore, the dehydrated and sintered glass base material 102 is first passed through Glass foundation The material is extended by the first extension device 900 to produce a glass rod 106 (S204). The glass rod 106 has a diameter of 3mm to 5mm, which is convenient for pulling out the optical fiber from 30mm to 80mm. The glass rod 106 passes through Glass rod transmission device 38 (S205) transmission. The glass rod 106 receiver will be heated and extended to a specified diameter through the glass rod second extension device 1 丨 丨 to produce a prefabricated part 107 (S206) The preform 107 is heated and extended to a similar thin wire form through the preform pull-out device 500 to produce an optical fiber (S210). Figure 5 shows the first extension device 900 made of glass base material. The first extension device 900 of the glass base material includes a first extension device 402 for heating and extending the glass base material 102, and a glass rod melting device. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification ( 21〇X 297 Public Love) (Please read the phonetic on the back? Matters before filling out this page)

517043517043

File:5 546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(θ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 37〇用以融化玻璃竿106。第一延長裝置402具有一延長熔爐 130,其具有一加熱熔爐10〇,以及一懸吊機制134被提供在 延長熔爐130之上。懸吊機制134用以供應玻璃基礎材質ι〇2 至延長熔爐130之內部在一規定速度下。 第一延長裝置402更具有一延長機制14〇被提供在延長 熔爐130之下,以支撐縮減的直徑之玻璃竿1〇6,及在一規定 速度下拉出玻璃竿106。懸吊機制134具有一基礎材質固定單 元136,用以支撐玻璃基礎材質102。延長機制140具有一延 長卡夾142,用以支撐玻璃竿1〇6。玻璃竿融化裝置370具有 一噴燒器1?6、一旋轉台210、一定時輸送帶214、一馬達212、 一支撐腳208、一噴燒器架216、一延長裝置206,以及一延 長融解卡夾218。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 玻璃基礎材質102被安裝在基礎材質固定單元136上, 並在一規定速度下被送入加熱熔爐100內。玻璃基礎材質1〇2 經由加熱熔爐100加熱,然後經由延長卡夾142支撐與拉出, 以縮減直徑來製造出一玻璃竿106。玻璃竿106經由延長裝置 206在一速度下被拉出以獲得適合的直徑,使得玻璃基礎材質 102被延長至想要的直徑。同時,經由一直徑量測裝置丨52來 量測玻璃竿106的直徑。爲了延長玻璃竿1〇6至想要的直徑, 給料窃(feeder)2〇4、加熱给爐1〇〇與延長裝置206會依據此量 測結果被控制。 玻璃竿106被延長至一規定直徑與長度後,其部分會被 噴燒器176所融化,而其不包括氣泡或不包括其直徑之氣泡 大約爲0.3mm或以上。氧氣與氫氣之燃燒是一合理的噴燒器 22 本紙張尺度適用中關家標準(CNS)A4規格(21G X 297公釐) ~ ' 517043File: 5 546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (θ) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 37〇 Used to melt the glass rod 106. The first extension device 402 has an extension furnace 130 having a heating furnace 100, and a suspension mechanism 134 is provided above the extension furnace 130. The suspension mechanism 134 is used to supply the glass base material OM2 to the interior of the extension furnace 130 at a predetermined speed. The first extension device 402 further has an extension mechanism 14 provided below the extension furnace 130 to support the glass rod 106 of the reduced diameter, and the glass rod 106 is pulled out at a prescribed speed. The suspension mechanism 134 has a base material fixing unit 136 for supporting the glass base material 102. The extension mechanism 140 has an extension clip 142 for supporting the glass rod 106. The glass rod melting device 370 has a burner 1-6, a rotating table 210, a certain time conveyor belt 214, a motor 212, a support leg 208, a burner holder 216, an extension device 206, and an extension melting Clip 218. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the glass base material 102 is mounted on the base material fixing unit 136, and is fed into the heating furnace 100 at a predetermined speed. The glass base material 10 is heated by the heating furnace 100, and then supported and pulled out through the extension clip 142 to reduce the diameter to produce a glass rod 106. The glass rod 106 is pulled out at a speed through the extension device 206 to obtain a suitable diameter, so that the glass base material 102 is extended to a desired diameter. At the same time, the diameter of the glass rod 106 is measured via a diameter measuring device 52. In order to extend the glass rod 106 to the desired diameter, the feeder 204, the heating furnace 100, and the extension device 206 are controlled based on the measurement results. After the glass rod 106 is extended to a predetermined diameter and length, a part of the glass rod 106 is melted by the burner 176, and it does not include bubbles or bubbles having a diameter of about 0.3 mm or more. Combustion of oxygen and hydrogen is a reasonable burner. This paper size is applicable to Zhongguanjia Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21G X 297 mm) ~ '517043

File:5 546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(2(?) 176之加熱裝置。依據碳氫化合物燃料之氣體燃燒例如丙烷和 氧氣也可被使用於噴燒器176。 噴燒器Π6經由支撐腳208被安裝在旋轉台21〇上。旋 轉台210透過一驅動裝置例如馬達212並經由定時輸送帶214 旋轉。旋轉台210被安裝在噴燒器架216上。玻璃竿融化裝 置370經由旋轉噴燒器176加熱玻璃竿1〇6來融化玻璃竿 106,以及使用具有一規定速度與拉出強度之延長融解卡夾 218來延長玻璃竿106。 第6圖繪示的是第一延長裝置402的架構圖,其經由一 基礎材質固定單元136支撐一標準竿138,以調整用以延長玻 璃基礎材質102之軸線。懸吊機制134具有一機制未繪示於 圖中,用以調整基礎材質固定單元136之垂直傾度。延長機 制H0具有一機制,也未繪示於圖中,用以調整延長卡夾I42 之垂直傾度。延長機制M0更具有一機制,同樣未繪示於圖 中,用以在後方與前方以及左方與右方之水平相角之內,調 整延長機制140的位置。 第7圖繪示的是第4圖之玻璃基礎材質第一延長過程 (S204)的詳細流程圖。玻璃基礎材質第一延長過程(S204)具有 一過程,用以調整第一延長裝置402之延長軸線。首先,一 金屬或陶瓷竿被配製做爲一標準竿138。直線狀態之標準竿 138需被保證(guaranteed)。標準竿138通常具有一玻璃基礎材 質102之長度,且虛擬竿被鎔接於玻璃基礎材質102上。標 準竿138之直線狀態軸線被保證沿著全長度。 如第6圖所示,經由懸吊機制134之基礎材質固定單元 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 2听公釐) <請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) * 0 —^1 ϋ ·ϋ 1 a Μ— ^1 n —ϋ ^1 ·ϋ I *,^ 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043File: 5 546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 5. Description of the invention (2 (?) 176 heating device. Gas combustion based on hydrocarbon fuels such as propane and oxygen can also be used in the burner 176. The burner Π6 passes The support feet 208 are mounted on the rotary table 210. The rotary table 210 is rotated by a driving device such as a motor 212 and is rotated via a timing belt 214. The rotary table 210 is mounted on the burner rack 216. The glass rod melting device 370 is rotated The burner 176 heats the glass rod 106 to melt the glass rod 106, and extends the glass rod 106 using an extended melting clip 218 having a prescribed speed and pull-out strength. FIG. 6 shows a first extension device 402 A structural diagram of the structure, which supports a standard rod 138 through a base material fixing unit 136 to adjust the axis for extending the glass base material 102. The suspension mechanism 134 has a mechanism not shown in the figure for adjusting the base material fixing The vertical inclination of unit 136. The extension mechanism H0 has a mechanism, which is not shown in the figure, and is used to adjust the vertical inclination of the extension clip I42. The extension mechanism M0 has a mechanism, which is also not shown in the figure. To adjust the position of the extension mechanism 140 within the horizontal phase angles of the rear and front and the left and right. Fig. 7 shows the details of the first extension process (S204) of the glass base material in Fig. 4 Flow chart. The first extension process of glass base material (S204) has a process for adjusting the extension axis of the first extension device 402. First, a metal or ceramic rod is formulated as a standard rod 138. A linear standard rod 138 needs to be guaranteed. The standard rod 138 usually has the length of a glass base material 102, and the virtual rod is attached to the glass base material 102. The linear state axis of the standard rod 138 is guaranteed to follow the full length. As shown in Figure 6, the basic material fixed unit via the suspension mechanism 134 The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 2 mm) < Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) * 0 — ^ 1 ϋ · ϋ 1 a Μ— ^ 1 n —ϋ ^ 1 · ϋ I *, ^ Printed by the Employees' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 517043

File:5 5 46piil.doc pj B7 五、發明說明) 136支撐標準竿138 (S110) °接著,調整懸吊機制I34之傾度 A,使得標準竿138之方向符合垂直方向(S112)。隨後,在完 成調整過程之後,從基礎材質固定單元U6中移走標準竿Π8 (S114)。 第8圖繪示的是第一延長裝置402的架構圖,其經由延 長卡夾142支撐標準竿138。經由延長機制140之延長卡夾 142支撐標準竿138 (第7圖’S116)。接著,調整延長機制140 之傾度B,使得標準竿138之方向符合垂直方向(第7圖, S118)。同時,使得延長卡夾142維持標準竿138之縱向的近 似中心。調整懸吊機制134與延長機制140的步驟可被反轉。 延長機制140可先被調整,然後再調整懸吊機制134。 第9圖繪示的是第一延長裝置4〇2的架構圖,其經由懸 吊機制134與延長機制H0兩者來支撐標準竿138。在完成懸 吊機制134與延長機制140之調整步驟後,經由基礎材質固 定單元136支撐標準竿138,而標準竿138之最底端會被延長 卡夾142所支撐(第7圖,S120)。接著,調整延長機制140之 水平方向位置C或懸吊機制134之水平方向位置C,使得介 於垂直軸線與標準竿138間之水平方向差小於〇.5mm每lm 長(第7圖,S122)。 隨後,經由使用第一延長裝置4〇2延長玻璃基礎材質102 以產生玻璃竿106,其延長軸線會被調整(第7圖,S124) ◦最 後,玻璃竿106會經由玻璃竿融化裝置370被融化(第7圖, S126)。 第10圖與第11圖繪示的是使用延長滾輪144a與144b 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ------------------·訂、-------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 517043 pile:5 546pii 1 .doc 幻 B7 五、發明說明(之2) 於延長機制140上來取代延長卡夾142的範例圖。若是使用 延長滾輪l44a與144b來調整連接懸吊機制丨34與延長機制 140之軸線的垂直傾度,可採用下述方法。經由延長滾輪144a 與l44b支撐標準竿138相對於經由延長卡夾142支撐標準竿 138(第 7 圖,S116)。 隨後,經由調整直線F之水平傾度來調整延長機制 之傾度。直線F連接介於延長滾輪144a與14仆間之兩旋轉 軸線◦在延長機制140之傾度的調整步驟後(第7圖’ S118) ’ 延長滾輪144a與144b可垂直地支撐標準竿138。 然後,如第11圖所示,在此步驟中,經由懸吊機制134 之基礎材質固定單元136與延長機制140之延長滾輪144a與 144b支撐之標準竿138對應於經由基礎材質固定單元136與 延長卡夾142支撐之標準竿138(第7圖,S120)。接著,調整 連接懸吊機制134與延長機制140之軸線的垂直傾度E。此調 整步驟可經由調整延長機制140的位置在水平方向或調整懸 吊機制134的位置在水平方向來完成,此步驟對應於懸吊機 制134與延長機制140之水平方向位置的調整步驟(第7圖, S122)。 使用上述之調整方法,可輕易地調整連接懸吊機制134 與延長機制140之軸線的垂直傾度。此方法不僅適用於延長 直線的玻璃基礎材質102而在虛擬竿與玻璃基礎材質102間 不會有任何縫隙,而且適用於延長彎曲之玻璃基礎材質102, 以獲得具有在一想要的直線狀態範圍內之縮減直徑的玻璃竿 106。提供玻璃基礎材質102被鎔接於虛擬竿上,而在玻璃基 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -L. (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043File: 5 5 46piil.doc pj B7 V. Description of the invention) 136 Support standard bar 138 (S110) ° Next, adjust the inclination A of the suspension mechanism I34 so that the direction of the standard bar 138 matches the vertical direction (S112). Subsequently, after the adjustment process is completed, the standard rod Π8 is removed from the base material fixing unit U6 (S114). FIG. 8 shows a structural diagram of the first extension device 402, which supports the standard rod 138 via the extension clip 142. An extension clip 142 via an extension mechanism 140 supports a standard bar 138 (Fig. 7'S116). Next, adjust the inclination B of the extension mechanism 140 so that the direction of the standard rod 138 conforms to the vertical direction (FIG. 7, S118). At the same time, the extension clip 142 is maintained at the approximate center in the longitudinal direction of the par 138. The steps of adjusting the suspension mechanism 134 and the extension mechanism 140 can be reversed. The extension mechanism 140 may be adjusted first, and then the suspension mechanism 134 may be adjusted. FIG. 9 shows the architecture diagram of the first extension device 402, which supports the standard bar 138 via both the suspension mechanism 134 and the extension mechanism H0. After the adjustment steps of the suspension mechanism 134 and the extension mechanism 140 are completed, the standard rod 138 is supported by the basic material fixing unit 136, and the bottom end of the standard rod 138 is supported by the extension clip 142 (Fig. 7, S120). Next, adjust the horizontal position C of the extension mechanism 140 or the horizontal position C of the suspension mechanism 134 so that the horizontal direction difference between the vertical axis and the standard rod 138 is less than 0.5 mm per lm length (Figure 7, S122) . Subsequently, the glass base material 102 is extended by using the first extension device 402 to generate the glass rod 106, and the extension axis thereof is adjusted (Figure 7, S124). Finally, the glass rod 106 is melted through the glass rod melting device 370 (Figure 7, S126). Figures 10 and 11 show the use of extension rollers 144a and 144b. The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -------------- ---- · Order, -------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 517043 pile: 5 546pii 1 .doc Magic B7 V. Description of the invention (2) In the extension mechanism 140 Here is an example of the extension clip 142. If the extension rollers 144a and 144b are used to adjust the vertical inclination of the axis connecting the suspension mechanism 34 and the extension mechanism 140, the following method can be used. The standard rod 138 is supported via the extension rollers 144a and 144b relative to the standard rod 138 via the extension clip 142 (FIG. 7, S116). Subsequently, the inclination of the extension mechanism is adjusted by adjusting the horizontal inclination of the straight line F. The straight line F connects the two rotation axes between the extension rollers 144a and 14 °. After the inclination adjustment step of the extension mechanism 140 (Fig. 7'S118) ', the extension rollers 144a and 144b can vertically support the standard rod 138. Then, as shown in FIG. 11, in this step, the standard rod 138 supported by the base material fixing unit 136 of the suspension mechanism 134 and the extension rollers 144a and 144b of the extension mechanism 140 corresponds to the base material fixing unit 136 and extension A standard rod 138 supported by the clip 142 (FIG. 7, S120). Next, the vertical inclination E of the axis connecting the suspension mechanism 134 and the extension mechanism 140 is adjusted. This adjustment step can be completed by adjusting the position of the extension mechanism 140 in the horizontal direction or adjusting the position of the suspension mechanism 134 in the horizontal direction. This step corresponds to the step of adjusting the horizontal position of the suspension mechanism 134 and the extension mechanism 140 (No. 7 (S122). Using the above adjustment method, the vertical inclination of the axis connecting the suspension mechanism 134 and the extension mechanism 140 can be easily adjusted. This method is not only suitable for extending the glass base material 102 with a straight line without any gap between the virtual rod and the glass base material 102, but also suitable for extending the curved glass base material 102 to obtain a desired linear state range. Inside the reduced diameter glass rod 106. The glass base material 102 is attached to the virtual rod, and the basic paper size of the glass applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -L. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page ) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 517043

File:5546piil.doc 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(4) 礎材質1〇2與虛擬竿之軸線間不會有縫隙是可能的。. 對於經由懸吊機制134、延長機制140或經由懸吊機制 134與延長機制14〇兩者來支撐玻璃基礎材質1〇2的方法而 言’第一延長裝置4〇2可準確地調整延長軸線之垂直傾度。 因此,造成玻璃基礎材質102之熱軟化區域上之彎曲的彎曲 力矩可被減低。經由延長的玻璃基礎材質1〇2之寬度產生的 彎曲與延長機制140有關。玻璃基礎材質102可因此被延長 在一想要的直線狀態之範圍內,而不會在玻璃基礎材質1〇2 與虛擬竿之軸線間造成縫隙。 第12圖繪示的是玻璃基礎材質102的示意圖,其彎曲度 被量測。經由延長裝置402延長玻璃基礎材質102,並經由上 述調整方法調整其垂直傾度。接著,量測玻璃竿106之彎曲 度。首先,玻璃竿106被放置在水平安裝之兩軸承H8與149 上,使得直線連接可以是一標準線之軸承148與149的頂端。 接著,經由掃描量測裝置150沿著玻璃竿106使用一裝置例 如一標度測量裝置,從標準線量測高度之最大或最小値。 接著,玻璃竿106會被旋轉180度,並以相同的方法從 標準線量測局度之最大與最小値。介於第一量測最大値與下 一量測最小値間之差値的最大値或第一量測最小値與下一量 測最大値間之差値設定爲”2h”。此値被長度L1分成”h”,其爲 介於兩軸承148與149間之距離,代表每單位長度玻璃竿1〇6 之直線狀態。 具有虛擬竿而無縫隙之5段直線的玻璃基礎材質1〇2會 被第一延長裝置402在一調整的延長軸線延長,以產生5段 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ------------------—訂卜-------線, (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 517043File: 5546piil.doc Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (4) It is possible that there is no gap between the base material 102 and the axis of the virtual rod. For the method of supporting the glass base material 102 through the suspension mechanism 134, the extension mechanism 140, or both, the 'first extension device 402 can accurately adjust the extension axis Vertical tilt. Therefore, the bending moment which causes the bending in the heat-softened area of the glass base material 102 can be reduced. The bending caused by the extended width of the glass base material 102 is related to the extension mechanism 140. The glass base material 102 can thus be extended within a desired linear state range without creating a gap between the glass base material 102 and the axis of the virtual rod. Fig. 12 shows a schematic diagram of the glass base material 102, and its bending degree is measured. The glass base material 102 is extended through the extension device 402, and its vertical tilt is adjusted through the adjustment method described above. Next, the curvature of the glass rod 106 was measured. First, the glass rod 106 is placed on the two bearings H8 and 149 mounted horizontally, so that the straight connection can be the top of the bearings 148 and 149 of a standard line. Next, the maximum or minimum height of the height is measured from the standard line using a device such as a scale measuring device along the glass rod 106 via the scanning measuring device 150. Then, the glass rod 106 is rotated 180 degrees, and the maximum and minimum of the local degree are measured from the standard line in the same way. The maximum value between the difference between the maximum value of the first measurement and the minimum value of the next measurement or the difference between the minimum value of the first measurement and the maximum value of the next measurement is set to "2h". This frame is divided into "h" by the length L1, which is the distance between the two bearings 148 and 149, and represents the linear state of the glass rod 106 per unit length. The five-segment straight glass base material 102 with a virtual rod is seamlessly extended by the first extension device 402 on an adjusted extension axis to produce five sections. This paper is sized to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------------- Ordering ----------- line, (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 517043

File:5 546pii 1 .doc B7 五、發明說明(4) (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 玻璃竿106。每一玻璃竿1〇6之直線狀態會經由第I2圖所示 之方法被量測。玻璃竿106之”h”都在0.5mm之內。接著,玻 璃竿106會經由第一延長裝置402延長,而無須調整延長軸 線。平均百分之90的玻璃竿106是彎曲的,代表玻璃竿1〇6 需透過延長軸線之調整被修正。 弟13圖繪不的是經由第一^延長裝置402控制延長檢輪 M4a與144b之旋轉速度的機構圖。第一延長裝置402分別控 制每一^延長滚輪l44a與144b之旋轉速度。玻璃基礎材質1〇2 經由弟一^延長裝置402之基礎材質固定單兀136懸吊,並在 一規定速度下被送至加熱熔爐(未繪示於圖中)中。玻璃竿106 會被加熱熔爐所加熱及軟化,並被一對延長滾輪144a與144b 抓住。 經由使用直徑量測裝置152來量測玻璃基礎材質102之 熱軟化區域的直徑,可獲得玻璃基礎材質102之熱軟化區域 的中心位置。在相同時間,此量測直徑的中心位置可被計算 出。一雷射光束傳輸型式直徑量測裝置被用來做爲直徑量測 裝置1S2。此雷射光束透過提供於加熱熔爐中之加熱器的較低 部分上之窗口,被照射在玻璃基礎材質102之熱軟化區域上。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 此量測直徑被輸入至直徑控制單元156中,以計算出介 於目標直徑値與量測直徑間之差値。延長滾輪144a之旋轉速 度係依據直徑之計算差値來控制。接著,熱軟化區域之中心 位置上的訊息會被輸入至位置控制單元158中。 位置控制單元158計算介於熱軟化區域之中心位置與第 一延長裝置402之延長軸線154間的偏差數。位置控制單元 27 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ' 517043 A7File: 5 546pii 1 .doc B7 V. Description of the invention (4) (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) Glass rod 106. The linear state of each glass rod 106 is measured by the method shown in Figure I2. The "h" of the glass rod 106 are all within 0.5 mm. Then, the glass rod 106 is extended by the first extension device 402 without adjusting the extension axis. On average, 90% of the glass rods 106 are curved, meaning that the glass rod 106 needs to be corrected by adjusting the extension axis. Brother 13 cannot draw a mechanism diagram for controlling the rotation speed of the extension check wheels M4a and 144b via the first extension device 402. The first extension device 402 controls the rotation speed of each extension roller 144a and 144b, respectively. The glass base material 102 is suspended by the base material fixing unit 136 of the base material of the extension device 402, and is sent to a heating furnace (not shown in the figure) at a predetermined speed. The glass rod 106 is heated and softened by the heating furnace, and is grasped by a pair of extension rollers 144a and 144b. By measuring the diameter of the heat-softened area of the glass base material 102 using the diameter measuring device 152, the center position of the heat-softened area of the glass base material 102 can be obtained. At the same time, the center position of this measured diameter can be calculated. A laser beam transmission type diameter measuring device is used as the diameter measuring device 1S2. This laser beam passes through a window provided on the lower part of the heater in the heating furnace, and is irradiated on the heat-softened area of the glass base material 102. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs This measured diameter is input into the diameter control unit 156 to calculate the difference between the target diameter 値 and the measured diameter 値. The rotation speed of the extension roller 144a is controlled based on the calculated difference in diameter. Then, the information at the center position of the heat-softened area is input to the position control unit 158. The position control unit 158 calculates the number of deviations between the center position of the heat-softened area and the extension axis 154 of the first extension device 402. Position control unit 27 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) '' 517043 A7

File: 5 546piil.doc _B7_____ 五、發明說明($) (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) I58更計算旋轉速度的修正値,其可減小介於熱軟化區域之中 心位置與延長軸線154間的偏差數至實際零點。接著,位置 控制單兀158依據此增加的修正値與延長滾輪144a之旋轉速 度來控制延長滾輪144b之旋轉速度。 第I4圖繪示的是介於玻璃基礎材質102之熱軟化區域之 中心位置與延長軸線154間之偏差數與玻璃竿1〇6造成之彎 曲度間的關係圖◦介於玻璃基礎材質1〇2之熱軟化區域之中 心位置與延長軸線154間之偏差數較大,玻璃竿106中之結 式彎曲(resultant bent)較大。 當偏差數大時,延長滾輪144a與144b之表面上的熱電 阻元件會變形。延長滚輪14如與M4b之形狀彼此會變的稍微 不同。此結果爲延長滾輪144a與144b之表面的旋轉速度彼此 不同。若延長滾輪144a與M4b之表面的變形是造成玻璃竿 106彎曲的原因之一,則玻璃竿1〇6之彎曲可經由分別控制每 一延長滾輪144a與144b之旋轉速度來縮減。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 延長滾輪144a與144b之表面係由一熱電阻材質例如非 石綿或石綿所形成。這些材質是熱電阻及易彎曲的,使得延 長滾輪l44a與144b可輕易地在高溫中來延長玻璃竿1〇6。接 觸玻璃竿106之延長滾輪144a與144b的表面,漸漸地經由高 溫與壓擠力或玻璃竿106之磨擦力而變形。因爲延長滾輪144a 與14朴之變形使得彼此漸漸地不同,則延長滾輪H4a與14仆 之表面的旋轉速度也會不同。 桌丨5圖繪示的是延長滾輪144a與144b之表面的變形 圖。延長滾輪;U4a之外側形狀與延長滾輪144b之外側形狀是 28 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標平(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) " '""""' 517043File: 5 546piil.doc _B7_____ 5. Description of the invention ($) (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) I58 also calculates the correction of the rotation speed 其, which can reduce the center position and Extend the number of deviations between the axes 154 to the actual zero point. Next, the position control unit 158 controls the rotation speed of the extension roller 144b based on the increased correction value 値 and the rotation speed of the extension roller 144a. Figure I4 shows the relationship between the number of deviations between the center position of the thermally softened area of the glass base material 102 and the extension axis 154 and the curvature caused by the glass rod 106. Between the glass base material 10 The number of deviations between the center position of the thermally softened region 2 and the extended axis 154 is large, and the result bent in the glass rod 106 is large. When the number of deviations is large, the thermoelectric resistance elements on the surfaces of the extension rollers 144a and 144b are deformed. The shape of the extension roller 14 and M4b may be slightly different from each other. As a result, the rotation speeds of the surfaces of the extension rollers 144a and 144b are different from each other. If the deformation of the surfaces of the extension rollers 144a and M4b is one of the causes of the bending of the glass rod 106, the bending of the glass rod 106 can be reduced by controlling the rotation speed of each extension roller 144a and 144b separately. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. The surfaces of the extension rollers 144a and 144b are formed of a thermal resistance material such as non-asbestos or asbestos. These materials are thermally resistant and flexible, so that the extension rollers 144a and 144b can easily extend the glass rod 106 at high temperatures. The surfaces of the extension rollers 144a and 144b that contact the glass rod 106 are gradually deformed by the high temperature and pressing force or the friction force of the glass rod 106. Since the deformation of the extension rollers 144a and 14b gradually becomes different from each other, the rotation speeds of the surfaces of the extension rollers H4a and 14d will also be different. Table 5 shows the deformation of the surfaces of the extension rollers 144a and 144b. Extension roller; the outer shape of U4a and the outer shape of extension roller 144b are 28. This paper size applies to China National Standard Flat (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) " '" " " "' 517043

File.5546piil.doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(2t) 不同的◦批(batches)的數量是玻璃基礎材質102之數量,其都 被延長。如果批的數量增加’則變形與磨損跟著增進。其結 果爲,介於延長滚輪l44a與l44b間之延長數會變的不同,造 成玻璃基礎材質102之熱軟化區域的位置發生變動,並依序 地造成玻璃竿1〇6之彎曲。 第16圖繪示的是當金屬管係由第15圖所市在批數300 之延長滾輪l44a與14仆負載時,金屬管之加熱區域之中心位 置的變位圖。垂直軸代表金屬管之加熱區域之中心位置的變 位,以及水平軸代表時間。曲線A代表在延長滾輪144a與144b 之旋轉方向的偏差數之變動。曲線A顯示出在延長滾輪144a 與144b之單一旋轉期間,其變位之變動很大。曲線B顯示出 在延長滾輪l44a與l44b之軸方向,其變位之變動十分地小。 第17圖繪示的是經由實施例中之第一延長裝置402,熱 軟化區域之中心位置的變位圖。垂直軸代表玻璃基礎材質102 之熱軟化區域之中心位置的變位,以及水平軸代表從開始延 長之時間。在開始延長之1500秒後,熱軟化區域之變位會被 控制與維持在一小水平中。因此,經由分別控制每一延長滾 輪144a與l44b之旋轉速度,可製造出不具實體彎曲之玻璃竿 106 ◦此允許熱軟化區域之中心位置被維持在一相對地定點 中。 (比較的範例) 第18圖繪示的是當延長滾輪144a與144b之旋轉速度被 控制在相同旋轉速度時,熱軟化區域之中心位置的變動圖。 垂直軸代表玻璃基礎材質102之熱軟化區域之中心位置的變 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) --------訂--------線- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043File.5546piil.doc A7 B7 5. Description of the Invention (2t) The number of different batches is the number of glass base materials 102, all of which have been extended. If the number of batches is increased ', deformation and wear will increase. As a result, the number of extensions between the extension rollers l44a and l44b will be different, causing the position of the heat-softened area of the glass base material 102 to change, and sequentially causing the glass rod 106 to bend. Fig. 16 shows the displacement of the center position of the heating area of the metal pipe when the metal pipe system is loaded by 300 extension rollers 144a and 14 in the batch shown in Fig. 15. The vertical axis represents the displacement of the center position of the heated area of the metal tube, and the horizontal axis represents time. A curve A represents a change in the number of deviations in the rotation directions of the extension rollers 144a and 144b. Curve A shows that during a single rotation of the extension rollers 144a and 144b, the displacement thereof varies greatly. Curve B shows that the displacement of the extension rollers 144a and 144b is very small. FIG. 17 shows a displacement map of the center position of the heat-softened area via the first extension device 402 in the embodiment. The vertical axis represents the displacement of the center position of the heat-softened area of the glass base material 102, and the horizontal axis represents the time from the start. After 1500 seconds of the initial extension, the displacement of the heat-softened area is controlled and maintained at a small level. Therefore, by controlling the rotation speed of each of the extension rollers 144a and 144b separately, a glass rod 106 without solid bending can be manufactured. This allows the center position of the heat-softened area to be maintained at a relatively fixed point. (Comparative example) Fig. 18 is a graph showing the change in the center position of the heat-softened area when the rotation speeds of the extension rollers 144a and 144b are controlled at the same rotation speed. The vertical axis represents the variation of the center position of the heat-softened area of the glass base material 102. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the note on the back first? Matters before filling out this page) -------- Order -------- Line-Printed by Employee Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economy 517043

File:5 546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(4) 位,以及水平軸代表從開始延長之時間。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經由使用第17圖之相同的直徑量測裝置152來量測玻璃 基礎材質102之熱軟化區域的直徑,可製造出具有一規定直 徑之玻璃竿1〇6。延長滾輪與14仆之旋轉速度彼此會被 控制在相同的旋轉速度。熱軟化區域之中心位置的變動是很 大的,使得被延長的玻璃竿106上所造成之彎曲需要修正。 第19圖繪示的是用於第5圖之玻璃竿融化裝置370之噴 燒器176的另一實施例。環狀噴燒器176具有一氫氣供應管 190與一環形氣體入口 194,其都連接至一氧氣供應管192。 冷卻水196連接至冷卻水供應管198與冷卻水排出管200,且 其係被提供在環狀噴燒器176之外部區域上。環形氣體入口 194可以是單一層,用以噴出氫氣與氧氣之混合物。環形氣體 入口 194也可多層或三倍層,其從較上與較低層噴出氫氣, 以及從中間層噴出氧氣。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 在氫氣與氧氣被提供至環狀噴燒器176且燃燒之後,玻 璃竿106被放置在環狀噴燒器176之環內側。玻璃竿106之 表面會被火焰178融化。環狀噴燒器176可有效地加熱玻璃 竿106,所以不需過度加熱玻璃竿106。因此,當玻璃被加熱 至高於溫度攝氏2〇〇〇度時’將無法在玻璃竿106之融化表面 上看到玻璃表面上之不透明區域。 依照上述實施例’玻璃竿〗〇6會被融化。具有直徑爲 120mm之玻璃基礎材質1〇2會被環狀噴燒器176加熱十分 鐘。氫氣會在300公升/分鐘以及氧氣會在丨2〇公升/分鐘之速 率下,被提供至環狀噴燒器176中。當玻璃竿1〇6被融化時, 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) 517043File: 5 546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (4) Bit, and the horizontal axis represents the time from the beginning of the extension. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) By measuring the diameter of the heat-softened area of the glass base material 102 using the same diameter measuring device 152 shown in Figure 17, a glass rod with a specified diameter can be manufactured 1〇6. The rotation speeds of the extension roller and the servo are controlled at the same rotation speed with each other. The change in the center position of the heat-softened area is so large that the bending caused by the extended glass rod 106 needs to be corrected. Fig. 19 shows another embodiment of the burner 176 used in the glass rod melting device 370 of Fig. 5. The annular burner 176 has a hydrogen supply pipe 190 and an annular gas inlet 194, both of which are connected to an oxygen supply pipe 192. The cooling water 196 is connected to the cooling water supply pipe 198 and the cooling water discharge pipe 200, and it is provided on the outer area of the annular burner 176. The annular gas inlet 194 may be a single layer for ejecting a mixture of hydrogen and oxygen. The annular gas inlet 194 may also be multi-layered or triple-layered, which ejects hydrogen from the upper and lower layers and oxygen from the middle layer. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. After hydrogen and oxygen are supplied to the ring burner 176 and burned, the glass rod 106 is placed inside the ring of the ring burner 176. The surface of the glass rod 106 is melted by the flame 178. The annular burner 176 can effectively heat the glass rod 106, so that the glass rod 106 does not need to be heated excessively. Therefore, when the glass is heated to a temperature above 2000 ° C ', the opaque areas on the glass surface cannot be seen on the melting surface of the glass rod 106. According to the above embodiment, 'glass rod' 06 will be melted. A glass base material 102 having a diameter of 120 mm is heated by a ring burner 176 for ten minutes. Hydrogen is supplied to the annular burner 176 at a rate of 300 liters / minute and oxygen at a rate of 20 liters / minute. When the glass rod 106 is melted, the paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 mm) 517043

File:5546pii 1 .doc A _ A7 B7 五、發明說明(2δ) 玻璃竿106會經由延長而融化。玻璃竿106之融化表面會變 成圓形舵之形狀◦玻璃竿106表面的顏色是透明的。 第2〇圖繪示的是玻璃竿輸送裝置380的架構圖。玻璃竿 輸送裝置380係用來輸送經由第一延長裝置402產生之玻璃 竿106。玻璃竿106係由安裝在汽缸儲存盒244上之可移動的 支撐元件2Μ與固定的支撐元件246所支撐。當汽缸儲存盒 244內之汽缸(未繪不於圖中)被驅動時,可移動的支撐元件 245會朝著固定的支撐元件246的方向移動,藉以支撐玻璃竿 106。可移動的支撐元件245推動固定的支撐元件246的力 量,可經由修改流入汽缸之氣壓來修改。在玻璃竿106之輸 送期間,可經由操作一開關器來修改汽缸之氣壓。此開關器 被提供在操作開關盒248上。 本實施例具有一第二推力水準(level),用以推動可移動的 支撐元件245至固定的支撐元件246。此可經由調整流入汽缸 之氣壓的兩個可行水準之一來達成。舉例來說,推動可移動 的支撐元件245至固定的支撐元件246之推力的弱面是第一 支撐力,以及推力之強面是第二支撐力。第一支撐力被設定 在0.5公斤,以及第二支撐力被設定在80公斤。 汽缸之氣壓調整僅有兩種調整水準。氣壓調整可以是一 多水準調整型式用以調整多於三水準之氣壓,或是連續調整 型式用以提供一漸進的階梯式水準改變。旋轉的促動器25〇 透過汽缸儲存盒244旋轉可移動的支撐元件245與固定的支 撐元件246,用以將玻璃竿106從垂直狀況旋轉至水平狀況。 支撐架(holding flame)252經由連接玻璃竿輸送裝置380與第 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -------^丨tr---------線^j^· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043 :ile:5546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(巧) 一延長裝置402,支撐玻璃竿輸送裝置380。操控器(haruik)254 (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 係用來操作玻璃竿輸送裝置380。旋轉軸256用以旋轉汽缸儲 存盒244。 · 第21圖繪示的是第一延長裝置402之儲存容器224的示 意圖。儲存容器224具有一托盤260、一支柱262、一對支撐 元件234a與234b用以支撐玻璃竿106,以及一對支撐元件 236a與236b被提供在支撐元件234a與234b之下。支撐元件 234a、234b、236a與236b大體上是半圓形的,其確實地支撐 玻璃竿106在儲存容器224內。彼此地,各對支撐元件234a 與234b及支撐元件236a與236b形成圓形支撐元件。 每一支撐元件234a與234b及支撐元件236a與236b之 一端軸釘連接支柱262。其另一端經由軸釘257或軸釘258連 接對應對之支撐元件。支撐元件234a與234b經由軸釘257 連接,以及支撐元件236a與236b經由軸釘258連接。支柱 262之高度爲1550mm。托盤260之內部直徑爲300mm。每一 支撐元件之內部直徑爲180mm,其經由支撐元件對234a與 234b及支撐元件對236a與236b形成。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 若是接收儲存容器224內,則玻璃竿106具有80mm之 外部直徑,介於支柱262與玻璃竿106間之傾度α的角度, 在正面與背面方向的範圍可從-3.1度至+8.1度。介於玻璃竿 106與支柱262間之傾度/3的角度,在左面與右面方向的範圍 可從-5.9度至+ 5.9度。此處,傾度的角度是一有限値,玻璃竿 106可在此有限値內,以各種角度被接收在儲存容器224內。 玻璃竿106以各種角度位於儲存容器224內。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 517043 A7File: 5546pii 1 .doc A _ A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (2δ) The glass rod 106 will melt by extension. The melting surface of the glass rod 106 will change to the shape of a round rudder. The color of the surface of the glass rod 106 is transparent. FIG. 20 shows a structural diagram of the glass rod conveying device 380. The glass rod conveying device 380 is used for conveying the glass rod 106 produced through the first extension device 402. The glass rod 106 is supported by a movable support member 2M and a fixed support member 246 mounted on the cylinder storage box 244. When a cylinder (not shown) in the cylinder storage box 244 is driven, the movable support element 245 moves in the direction of the fixed support element 246 to support the glass rod 106. The force with which the movable support element 245 pushes the fixed support element 246 can be modified by modifying the air pressure flowing into the cylinder. During the transmission of the glass rod 106, the cylinder pressure can be modified by operating a switch. This switch is provided on the operation switch box 248. This embodiment has a second thrust level for pushing the movable support element 245 to the fixed support element 246. This can be achieved by adjusting one of the two possible levels of air pressure into the cylinder. For example, the weak side of the thrust pushing the movable supporting element 245 to the fixed supporting element 246 is the first supporting force, and the strong side of the thrust is the second supporting force. The first support force was set at 0.5 kg, and the second support force was set at 80 kg. There are only two adjustment levels for cylinder air pressure adjustment. The pressure adjustment can be a multi-level adjustment type to adjust the air pressure more than three levels, or a continuous adjustment type to provide a stepwise level change. The rotating actuator 25 rotates the movable support member 245 and the fixed support member 246 through the cylinder storage box 244 to rotate the glass rod 106 from a vertical state to a horizontal state. Supporting flame (holding flame) 252 is connected to the glass rod conveying device 380 and this paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)- ----- ^ 丨 tr --------- line ^ j ^ · Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 517043: ile: 5546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (Clever) 1 The extension device 402 supports the glass rod conveying device 380. Manipulator (haruik) 254 (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) It is used to operate the glass rod conveying device 380. The rotation shaft 256 is used to rotate the cylinder storage box 244. Fig. 21 is a schematic view of a storage container 224 of the first extension device 402. The storage container 224 has a tray 260, a pillar 262, a pair of support members 234a and 234b to support the glass rod 106, and a pair of support members 236a and 236b are provided under the support members 234a and 234b. The support elements 234a, 234b, 236a, and 236b are generally semi-circular, and they surely support the glass rod 106 within the storage container 224. Each other, each pair of support elements 234a and 234b and support elements 236a and 236b form a circular support element. One end of each of the supporting members 234a and 234b and the supporting members 236a and 236b is pivotally connected to the pillar 262. The other end is connected to a corresponding pair of supporting elements via a shaft pin 257 or a shaft pin 258. The support elements 234a and 234b are connected via a shaft pin 257, and the support elements 236a and 236b are connected via a shaft pin 258. The height of the pillar 262 is 1550 mm. The inner diameter of the tray 260 is 300 mm. The inner diameter of each support element is 180 mm, which is formed via the support element pairs 234a and 234b and the support element pairs 236a and 236b. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. If it is received in the storage container 224, the glass rod 106 has an external diameter of 80 mm, and the angle between the inclination α between the pillar 262 and the glass rod 106 can be in the range of front and back From -3.1 degrees to +8.1 degrees. The angle of inclination / 3 between the glass rod 106 and the pillar 262 can range from -5.9 degrees to +5.9 degrees in the left and right directions. Here, the angle of inclination is a finite angle within which the glass rod 106 can be received in the storage container 224 at various angles. The glass rod 106 is located within the storage container 224 at various angles. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 517043 A7

File:5546pii 1 .doc ___B7 ____ 五、發明說明(50) (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 第22圖繪τρ;的是當輸送玻璃竿106時,玻璃竿輸送裝置 380的移動圖。儲存容器224內之玻璃竿106係由具有第一支 撐力之可移動的支撐元件245與固定的支撐元件246所支撐 (b)。接著,玻璃竿106會被移動,使得玻璃竿1〇6垂直站立 至地於支撐元件234a與234b內(c)。因爲第一支撐力非常 弱,在玻璃竿106之移動期間,當力量大於供應至可移動的 支撐元件245之第一支撐力時,可移動的支撐元件245將會 被開啓。而且,介於可移動的支撐元件245與玻璃竿106間 之摩擦力會動作,而介於固定的支撐元件246與玻璃竿106 間之摩擦力相對於玻璃竿106之重量而言是很小的。因此, 經由第一支撐力支撐玻璃竿106,使玻璃竿106無法經由舉起 玻璃竿輸送裝置380而被舉起。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 在確定玻璃竿106垂直站立之後,玻璃竿輸送裝置380 之支撐力會被改變至第二支撐力(d)。然後,軸釘257與258 會被移走,而每一支撐元件234a與234b及支撐元件236a與 230b會被開啓。接著,玻璃竿輸送裝置38〇會抓著玻璃竿106 向儲存容器224外傳輸。從儲存容器224取走之玻璃竿106 會被旋轉至一水平位置,並被放置在保管場所上。在保管場 所上之玻璃竿106的水平放置期間,大於一定値之氣壓會被 供應至汽缸,以舉起及降低玻璃竿輸送裝置380 ◦因此,玻璃 竿輸送裝置380之重量不會被供應至玻璃竿106,以防止傷害 到玻璃竿1〇6。 第23圖繪示的是玻璃竿輸送裝置380的另一實施例◦此 實施例之玻璃竿輸送裝置380具有兩個旋轉機制A與B。每 33 本紙張尺度刺巾0 0家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公釐) A7 517043File: 5546pii 1 .doc ___B7 ____ V. Description of the invention (50) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Figure 22 shows τρ; when the glass rod 106 is conveyed, the glass rod conveying device 380 moves Illustration. The glass rod 106 in the storage container 224 is supported by a movable supporting member 245 having a first supporting force and a fixed supporting member 246 (b). Then, the glass rod 106 is moved so that the glass rod 106 stands vertically to the ground inside the supporting members 234a and 234b (c). Because the first supporting force is very weak, during the movement of the glass rod 106, when the force is greater than the first supporting force supplied to the movable supporting element 245, the movable supporting element 245 will be opened. Moreover, the friction force between the movable support element 245 and the glass rod 106 will act, and the friction force between the fixed support element 246 and the glass rod 106 is small relative to the weight of the glass rod 106 . Therefore, the glass rod 106 is supported by the first supporting force so that the glass rod 106 cannot be lifted by the glass rod conveying device 380. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs After determining that the glass rod 106 stands vertically, the supporting force of the glass rod conveying device 380 will be changed to the second supporting force (d). Then, the pins 257 and 258 are removed, and each of the supporting members 234a and 234b and the supporting members 236a and 230b are opened. Next, the glass rod conveying device 38 will grasp the glass rod 106 and transfer it out of the storage container 224. The glass rod 106 removed from the storage container 224 is rotated to a horizontal position and placed on a storage place. During the horizontal placement of the glass rod 106 on the storage place, air pressure greater than a certain pressure will be supplied to the cylinder to lift and lower the glass rod conveying device 380. Therefore, the weight of the glass rod conveying device 380 will not be supplied to the glass Rod 106 to prevent damage to the glass rod 106. Fig. 23 shows another embodiment of the glass rod conveying device 380. The glass rod conveying device 380 of this embodiment has two rotation mechanisms A and B. Every 33 sheets of standard paper towels 0 standard (CNS) A4 size (21 × X 297 mm) A7 517043

File:5546pii 1 .doc ___B7 _ 五、發明說明(今I) 一旋轉機制A與B具有一旋轉促動器。旋轉機制A透過旋轉 促動器250旋轉一旋轉軸256來旋轉玻璃竿106。旋轉機制B 透過旋轉促動器264旋轉一旋轉軸268,並透過連結軸266移 動玻璃竿1〇6向上與向下或向左與向右。旋轉軸268水平地 或垂直地與旋轉軸256平躺成直角。 第24圖繪示的是當玻璃竿輸送裝置380輸送玻璃竿1〇6 時’第23圖之玻璃竿輸送裝置380的移動圖。第24(a)圖係顯 示玻璃竿輸送裝置380的平面圖,其支撐玻璃竿:[〇6。第24(b) 圖係顯示玻璃竿輸送裝置380的剖面圖,其傳送玻璃竿106 至V區塊240。如第24(a)圖所示,可移動的支撐元件245與 246垂直地支撐玻璃竿106,並經由操作旋轉促動器250可將 玻璃竿106從垂直位置旋轉至水平位置。接著,如第24(b)所 示,經由啓動旋轉促動器264,使可移動的支撐元件245與固 定的支撐元件246向下旋轉。 經由啓動旋轉促動器264,可移動的支撐元件245之開 啓與關閉方向會從垂直方向改變成水平方向。因此,在開啓 可移動的支撐元件245並放置玻璃竿106於V區塊240上之 後,可移動的支撐元件245與固定的支撐元件246可向上放 開。經由包括不僅旋轉機制A旋轉玻璃竿106從垂直至水平 位置,而且旋轉機制B具有另一旋轉軸268與旋轉軸256平 躺成直角,因而使玻璃竿106之傳輸效能增加。 第25圖繪示的是本發明之玻璃竿第二延長裝置ill的架 構圖。玻璃竿第二延長裝置111包括一托台112、一固定卡夾 118、一可移動卡夾119、一加熱源122、一流量控制器278、 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -------------------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043File: 5546pii 1 .doc ___B7 _ 5. Description of the invention (now I) A rotation mechanism A and B have a rotation actuator. The rotation mechanism A rotates the glass rod 106 by rotating a rotation shaft 256 through a rotation actuator 250. The rotation mechanism B rotates a rotation shaft 268 through the rotation actuator 264, and moves the glass rod 106 up and down or left and right through the connecting shaft 266. The rotation axis 268 lies horizontally or vertically at right angles to the rotation axis 256. FIG. 24 shows the movement of the glass rod conveying device 380 of FIG. 23 when the glass rod conveying device 380 conveys the glass rod 106. Figure 24 (a) is a plan view showing the glass rod conveying device 380, which supports the glass rod: [〇6. Figure 24 (b) is a cross-sectional view showing a glass rod conveying device 380, which conveys the glass rod 106 to the V block 240. As shown in FIG. 24 (a), the movable supporting members 245 and 246 support the glass rod 106 vertically, and the glass rod 106 can be rotated from the vertical position to the horizontal position by operating the rotation actuator 250. Next, as shown in Section 24 (b), the movable support member 245 and the fixed support member 246 are rotated downward by activating the rotary actuator 264. By activating the rotary actuator 264, the opening and closing directions of the movable supporting member 245 are changed from a vertical direction to a horizontal direction. Therefore, after the movable supporting element 245 is opened and the glass rod 106 is placed on the V block 240, the movable supporting element 245 and the fixed supporting element 246 can be released upward. By including not only the rotating mechanism A to rotate the glass rod 106 from a vertical to a horizontal position, but also the rotating mechanism B having another rotation axis 268 lying at right angles to the rotation axis 256, thereby increasing the transmission efficiency of the glass rod 106. Fig. 25 is a block diagram showing the second extension device ill of the glass rod of the present invention. The second extension device 111 of the glass rod includes a bracket 112, a fixed clip 118, a movable clip 119, a heating source 122, a flow controller 278, and the paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications ( 210 X 297 mm) ------------------- Order --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Ministry of Economy Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative 517043

File:5546pi il.doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(义) 尾端支撐架114與116、一尾端支撐架驅動馬達275、· 一尾端 支撐架驅動編碼器273、一^直徑墓測裝置124、一^移動支架 120、一滑行推動器270、一移動支架馬達274、一移動支架 編碼器272、一鏈條276與一控制單元280。 固定卡夾118與可移動卡夾119支撐玻璃竿1〇6,且分 別在其兩端鎔接有一虛擬竿108。加熱源122加熱經由固定卡 夾118與可移動卡夾Π9支撐之玻璃竿106。流量控制器278 調整供應至加熱源122之氣體數量。經由移動可移動卡夾 119,尾端支撐架116延長玻璃竿106。尾端支撐架驅動馬達 275驅動尾端支撐架116。尾端支撐架驅動編碼器273偵測旋 轉數量及控制尾端支撐架驅動馬達275之速度。尾端支撐架 116之移動距離可從尾端支撐架驅動編碼器273偵測到之尾端 支撐架驅動馬達275的旋轉數量評估出。 直徑量測裝置124量測對應沿著玻璃竿106之軸線方向 的位置之玻璃竿106的直徑。加熱源122與直徑量測裝置124 被提供在移動支架120上。移動支架120移動加熱源Π2與 直徑量測裝置U4。移動支架120被提供在托台112上。移動 支架120可沿著滑行推動器270移動,其被安裝平行於連接 固定卡夾118與可移動卡夾119之軸線上。移動支架120經 由移動支架馬達274透過滑行推動器270被驅動。移動支架 編碼器272控制移動支架馬達274之速度。 控制單元280經由控制移動支架編碼器272、移動支架 馬達274、鏈條276、滑行推動器270與移動支架120,來控 制加熱源122之移動距離。控制單元280經由控制流量控制 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) --------II---------線41^— 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043File: 5546pi il.doc A7 B7 V. Explanation of the invention (meaning) Tail end support frames 114 and 116, a tail end support frame drive motor 275, a tail end support frame drive encoder 273, and a ^ diameter tomb measuring device 124 A moving bracket 120, a sliding pusher 270, a moving bracket motor 274, a moving bracket encoder 272, a chain 276, and a control unit 280. The fixed clip 118 and the movable clip 119 support the glass rod 106, and a virtual rod 108 is connected to the two ends of the glass rod 106, respectively. The heating source 122 heats the glass rod 106 supported by the fixed clip 118 and the movable clip Π9. The flow controller 278 adjusts the amount of gas supplied to the heating source 122. By moving the movable clip 119, the tail end support 116 extends the glass rod 106. The tail end support frame driving motor 275 drives the tail end support frame 116. The tail end support frame drive encoder 273 detects the number of rotations and controls the speed of the tail end support frame drive motor 275. The moving distance of the tail end support frame 116 can be estimated from the number of rotations of the tail end support frame drive motor 275 detected by the tail end support frame drive encoder 273. The diameter measuring device 124 measures the diameter of the glass rod 106 corresponding to a position along the axis direction of the glass rod 106. The heating source 122 and the diameter measuring device 124 are provided on the moving bracket 120. The moving support 120 moves the heating source UI2 and the diameter measuring device U4. A mobile stand 120 is provided on the pallet 112. The moving bracket 120 is movable along the sliding pusher 270, and is mounted parallel to the axis connecting the fixed clip 118 and the movable clip 119. The moving stand 120 is driven by the moving stand motor 274 through the slide pusher 270. The moving bracket encoder 272 controls the speed of the moving bracket motor 274. The control unit 280 controls the moving distance of the heating source 122 by controlling the moving bracket encoder 272, the moving bracket motor 274, the chain 276, the sliding pusher 270, and the moving bracket 120. The control unit 280 controls the size of the paper by controlling the flow rate of the paper. Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) -------- II --------- Line 41 ^ — Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 517043

File:5546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(w) 器278,控制提供至加熱源122之氣體數量。控制單元280經 由控制尾端支撐架驅動編碼器273來控制尾端支撐架116之 移動速度,尾端支撐架驅動編碼器273用以控制尾端支撐架 驅動馬達275之旋轉速度。控制單元280經由控制尾端支撐 架116之移動速度,控制玻璃竿1〇6之延長速度。 尾端支撐架114與116、固定卡夾118、可移動卡夾119、 尾端支撐架驅動馬達275與尾端支撐架驅動編碼器273構成 一延長單元,用以延長玻璃竿1〇6。 量測之量測直徑與位置上的資料可經由直徑量測裝置 124量測出,以及玻璃竿106之長度變化上的資料,可從輸入 至控制單元280中之尾端支撐架116的移動距離來獲得。控 制單元280依據控制因素例如加熱源122之移動距離、提供 至加熱源122之氣體數量的輸入資料來控制加熱狀況,並且 也會依據輸入資料來控制尾端支撐架116之延長速度。 第26圖繪示的是第4圖之玻璃竿第二延長過程(S206)的 詳細流程圖。首先,虛擬竿108經由固定卡夾118與可移動 卡夾119支撐。隨後,玻璃竿106之兩端被鎔接至虛擬竿108 (S146),使得玻璃竿1()6被安置在玻璃竿第二延長裝置U1 上。接著,一 3mm深之切口 284被製造在環繞玻璃竿106與 虛擬竿108之連接上如同一標記。 接著設定玻璃竿106之直徑量測的開始與完成位置以及 目標直徑(Sl5〇)。量測對應沿著玻璃竿106之軸線方向的位置 之玻璃竿106的直徑(Si52)。依據對應量測直徑之量測直徑與 位置’設定沿著玻璃竿106之軸線方向的複數個位置中之延 36 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) --------·1 訂·'--------線赢 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043File: 5546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 5. Description of the Invention (w) The device 278 controls the amount of gas supplied to the heating source 122. The control unit 280 controls the moving speed of the tail end support frame 116 by controlling the tail end support frame driving encoder 273, and the tail end support frame driving encoder 273 is used to control the rotation speed of the tail end support frame driving motor 275. The control unit 280 controls the extension speed of the glass rod 106 by controlling the moving speed of the tail support frame 116. The tail end support frames 114 and 116, the fixed clip 118, the movable clip 119, the tail end support frame drive motor 275, and the tail end support frame drive encoder 273 constitute an extension unit for extending the glass rod 106. The measured diameter and position data can be measured by the diameter measuring device 124, and the data on the length change of the glass rod 106 can be input from the moving distance of the tail support 116 in the control unit 280. Come to get. The control unit 280 controls the heating condition based on input data such as the moving distance of the heating source 122 and the amount of gas provided to the heating source 122, and also controls the extension speed of the tail end support frame 116 based on the input data. Fig. 26 shows a detailed flowchart of the second extension process (S206) of the glass rod in Fig. 4. First, the virtual rod 108 is supported via a fixed clip 118 and a movable clip 119. Subsequently, both ends of the glass rod 106 are connected to the virtual rod 108 (S146), so that the glass rod 1 () 6 is placed on the glass rod second extension device U1. Next, a 3mm deep cut 284 is made as the same mark on the connection between the glass rod 106 and the virtual rod 108. Next, the start and finish positions of the diameter measurement of the glass rod 106 and the target diameter are set (S150). The diameter (Si52) of the glass rod 106 corresponding to the position along the axis of the glass rod 106 was measured. According to the measurement diameter and position corresponding to the measurement diameter ', set the extension in a plurality of positions along the axis direction of the glass rod 106. 36 This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) (Please First read the note on the back? Matters and then fill out this page) -------- · 1 Order · '-------- Line Winning Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau Employee Consumption Cooperatives Printing Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Printed by the Bureau's Consumer Cooperatives 517043

File:5546pii 1 .doc 幻 B7 五、發明說明(外) 長速度。依據玻璃竿106之直徑的平均値’設定包括提供至 加熱源122之氣體數量與加熱源122之移動距離的加熱狀況 (S153) ◦玻璃竿106會被具有一預設加熱狀況之加熱源I22加 熱,以及被具有一預設延長速度移動之尾端支撐架116逐漸 的延長。 爲了偵測玻璃竿1〇6兩端之位置,接著直徑量測裝置124 會偵測被提供在環繞玻璃竿1〇6與虛擬竿108之連接上之切 口 284的位置。爲了量測沿著軸線方向之玻璃竿1〇6的長度 變化,經由尾端支撐架驅動編碼器273量測尾贿支擦架116 之移動距離。 接著在朝著玻璃竿106之中心方向離切口 284大約5〇mm 的位置,量測玻璃竿106之直徑(S156)。依據切口 284的位置 與沿著軸線方向之玻璃竿106的長度變化,設定加熱源122 之加熱位置。依據量測直徑設定提供至加熱源122之氣體數 量。並依據量測直徑設定尾端支撐架116之移動速度(S157)。 在一預設加熱狀況與延長速度下加熱與延長玻璃竿106,使玻 璃竿106被尾端拉出。玻璃竿106之尾端的形狀因此變成類 似一圓錐形狀,使得玻璃竿106之尾端直徑減小(S158)。 接著經由量測尾端拉出部分之直徑偵測出此尾端拉出部 分的位置,並且經由在對應位置尾端拉出來延長此部份◦沿 著軸線方向之玻璃竿106的長度變化,係經由尾端支撐架驅 動編碼器273量測之尾端拉出所造成(S160)。接著設定以火焰 來硏磨玻璃竿106之火焰硏磨(fire polishing)的開始與完成位 置及火焰的加熱功率。此設定係依據尾端拉出部分之偵測位 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -------^—tr---------線4^^· A7 517043File: 5546pii 1 .doc Magic B7 V. Description of the invention (outside) Long speed. According to the average of the diameter of the glass rod 106, the heating conditions including the amount of gas provided to the heating source 122 and the moving distance of the heating source 122 are set (S153). The glass rod 106 is heated by the heating source I22 with a preset heating condition , And gradually extended by the tail end support frame 116 having a preset extension speed. In order to detect the positions of both ends of the glass rod 106, the diameter measuring device 124 then detects the position of the cutout 284 provided around the connection between the glass rod 106 and the virtual rod 108. In order to measure the length change of the glass rod 106 along the axis direction, the encoder 273 is driven to measure the moving distance of the tail support frame 116 through the tail support frame. Next, the diameter of the glass rod 106 is measured at a position about 50 mm away from the cutout 284 toward the center of the glass rod 106 (S156). The heating position of the heating source 122 is set based on the position of the cutout 284 and the length change of the glass rod 106 along the axis direction. The amount of gas provided to the heating source 122 is set according to the measurement diameter. The moving speed of the tail end support frame 116 is set according to the measured diameter (S157). The glass rod 106 is heated and extended under a preset heating condition and extension speed, so that the glass rod 106 is pulled out by the tail end. The shape of the rear end of the glass rod 106 thus becomes a cone-like shape, so that the diameter of the rear end of the glass rod 106 is reduced (S158). Then measure the diameter of the pull-out part of the tail end to detect the position of the pull-out part at the tail end, and extend this part by pulling out at the corresponding end of the pull-out part. Driven by the tail end of the encoder to measure the tail end of the encoder through the tail end support frame (273) (S160). Then, the start and finish positions of the flame polishing for polishing the glass rod 106 with the flame and the heating power of the flame are set. This setting is based on the detection position of the tail end of the paper. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297). (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) ----- -^-Tr --------- line 4 ^^ · A7 517043

File:5546pii 1 .doc __ B7___ 五、發明說明(无Γ) 置與沿著軸線方向之玻璃竿106的長度變化(S161)。· 依據玻璃竿1〇6上之黑影位置,設定開始與完成火焰硏 磨的位置。在尾端拉出過程期間,會在強加熱之一區域中產 生黑影◦玻璃竿106會被加熱源122火焰硏磨,以做爲從設 定火焰硏磨開始位置至設定火焰硏磨完成位置之每一預設火 焰狀況(S162)。在火焰硏磨之後,經由量測玻璃竿106之完成 的直徑與長度,檢查玻璃竿106的形狀(S164)。接著從玻璃竿 106移走虛擬竿108 (S166)。最後,對玻璃竿106進行表面處 理,以製造出一預製件107 (S168)。 如上所述,在每一延長(S154)、尾端拉出(S158)與火焰硏 磨(S162)過程之前,直徑會在沿著玻璃竿106之軸方向的對應 位置被量測出。由此資料,可準確地設定用以下一過程之加 熱狀況與延長速度。因此,可製造出穩定地高品質之玻璃竿 106 〇 第27圖繪示的是提供在固定卡夾118上之冷卻裝置330 與玻璃竿第二延長裝置111之可移動卡夾Π9的範例圖。冷 卻裝置330保護固定卡夾118與可移動卡夾119,以排除從加 熱源122產生之輻射熱。此可經由環繞固定卡夾118與可移 動卡夾Π9之循環的冷卻水來達成。冷卻裝置33〇使用一氣 體或液體做爲一冷卻媒介。 可經由提供冷卻裝置330於固定卡夾118與可移動卡夾 Π9上,控制固定卡夾118與可移動卡夾119之變形。此允許 控制固定卡夾118與可移動卡夾119之溫度上升。因此,旋 轉玻璃竿106之驅動力之傳送的準確度被維持,以及玻璃竿 38 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規袼(210 X 297公愛) ' ------------------^-訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043File: 5546pii 1 .doc __ B7___ V. Description of the invention (without Γ) and the length change of the glass rod 106 along the axis direction (S161). · According to the position of the black shadow on the glass rod 106, set the position to start and finish the flame honing. During the tail-end drawing process, black shadows will be generated in one of the areas of strong heating. The glass rod 106 will be flame-honed by the heating source 122, as a step from the set flame honing start position to the set flame honing completion position Each preset flame condition (S162). After flame honing, the shape of the glass rod 106 is checked by measuring the completed diameter and length of the glass rod 106 (S164). The virtual pole 108 is then removed from the glass pole 106 (S166). Finally, the glass rod 106 is subjected to surface treatment to produce a preform 107 (S168). As described above, before each extension (S154), tail end extraction (S158), and flame honing (S162) processes, the diameter is measured at a corresponding position along the axis of the glass rod 106. From this data, the heating condition and extension speed for the next process can be accurately set. Therefore, a stable and high-quality glass rod 106 can be manufactured. Figure 27 shows an example of the cooling device 330 provided on the fixed clip 118 and the movable clip Π9 of the second extension 111 of the glass rod. The cooling device 330 protects the fixed clip 118 and the movable clip 119 from the radiant heat generated from the heating source 122. This can be achieved by circulating cooling water around the fixed clip 118 and the movable clip Π9. The cooling device 33 uses a gas or a liquid as a cooling medium. The cooling device 330 can be provided on the fixed clip 118 and the movable clip Π9 to control the deformation of the fixed clip 118 and the movable clip 119. This allows controlling the temperature rise of the fixed clip 118 and the movable clip 119. Therefore, the transmission accuracy of the driving force of the rotating glass rod 106 is maintained, and the paper size of the glass rod 38 applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Regulation (210 X 297) ---------- ^-Order --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Employee Consumption Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy

File:5546piil.doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(3fc) 106之加熱作用變得較相等◦因此,玻璃竿1〇6之直徑的變動 減小。 (範例) 經由具有如第27圖所示之冷卻裝置330與加熱源122之 固定卡夾118與可移動卡夾119,火焰硏磨出50mm直徑與 1000mm長度之玻璃竿106。150 SLM之氧氣(〇2)與300 SLM 之氫氣(H2)被供應至加熱源122以做爲燃燒氣體。玻璃竿1〇6 會在I5 rpm之速度下被旋轉。經由移動加熱源122使玻璃竿 106在大約20mm/分之速度下,火焰硏磨玻璃竿106。 第28圖繪示的是上述範例與下述比較的範例之固定卡 夾118與可移動卡夾119的溫度圖。垂直軸代表固定卡夾118 與可移動卡夾119的溫度,以及水平軸代表火焰硏磨之進行 時間。範例之固定卡夾118與可移動卡夾119的溫度被維持 在大約攝氏45度(45°C)之一低溫中。經由固定卡夾118與可 移動卡夾119之小量變形,造成旋轉玻璃竿106之驅動力的 結式變動。因此火焰硏磨的玻璃竿106之直徑的變動僅有 0.02%。 (比較的範例) 在從第27圖之固定卡夾118與可移動卡夾119中移去冷 卻裝置330的情況下,玻璃竿106在上述範例之相同狀況下 被火焰硏磨◦如第28圖所示,固定卡夾118與可移動卡夾1 Μ 之溫度到達大約攝氏1〇〇度。固定卡夾118與可移動卡夾119 因此而變形,所以旋轉玻璃竿106之驅動力變動。在火焰硏 磨增加至1.0%之後,玻璃竿106之直徑的變動會大於上述範 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -------------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043File: 5546piil.doc A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (3fc) The heating effect of 106 becomes more equal. Therefore, the variation of the diameter of the glass rod 106 is reduced. (Example) Through a fixed clamp 118 and a movable clamp 119 with a cooling device 330 and a heating source 122 as shown in FIG. 27, a glass rod 106 with a diameter of 50 mm and a length of 1000 mm is flame-honed by flame. 〇2) Hydrogen (H2) with 300 SLM is supplied to the heating source 122 as a combustion gas. The glass rod 106 is rotated at a speed of I5 rpm. The glass rod 106 is flame-honed by moving the heating source 122 at a speed of about 20 mm / min. Fig. 28 is a graph showing the temperature of the fixed clip 118 and the movable clip 119 of the above example and the comparative example described below. The vertical axis represents the temperature of the fixed clamp 118 and the movable clamp 119, and the horizontal axis represents the flame honing time. The temperature of the exemplary fixed clip 118 and the movable clip 119 is maintained at a low temperature of about 45 degrees (45 ° C). Through the small deformation of the fixed clip 118 and the movable clip 119, the driving force of the rotating glass rod 106 is changed. Therefore, the diameter variation of the flame-honed glass rod 106 is only 0.02%. (Comparative example) In the case where the cooling device 330 is removed from the fixed clip 118 and the movable clip 119 of FIG. 27, the glass rod 106 is honed by flames in the same condition as the above example. As shown in FIG. 28 As shown, the temperature of the fixed clip 118 and the movable clip 1 M reaches approximately 100 degrees Celsius. As the fixed clip 118 and the movable clip 119 are deformed, the driving force of the rotating glass rod 106 is changed. After the flame honing is increased to 1.0%, the diameter change of the glass rod 106 will be larger than the above template. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ----------- -------- Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperatives of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed

File: 5546piil.doc J\t B7 五、發明說明(^1) 例之變動度。 第29圖繪示的是介於加熱源122與直徑量測裝置124間 距離與玻璃竿106之直徑變動百分比間的關係圖。玻璃竿1〇6 之直徑的變動率(%)代表(玻璃竿106之直徑的最大値-玻璃竿 106之直徑的最小値)/(平均直徑)X 100。 第25圖所示之玻璃竿第二延長裝置111之直徑量測裝置 124被提供在一位置上,其爲一定距離,離加熱源122之距離 從10mm至5〇mm。因此,玻璃竿106之直徑可被準確地量測 出,允許準確控制玻璃竿106之直徑。 當延長玻璃竿106時,由於加熱源122移動,使得玻璃 竿106之最高溫度的位置會稍微不同於加熱源122加熱的位 置。在玻璃竿106之最高溫度的位置中,每單位之延長速度 變成最大。 想要的是,依據最大延長速度之位置的直徑與直徑之目 標値’控制加熱源122之加熱功率與可移動卡夾119之移動 速度。可移動卡夾119之移動速度係依據介於直徑之目標値 與在玻璃竿106之最大延長速度的位置量測出之直徑間的差 異來控制。此可經由提供直徑量測裝置124於離加熱源122 一定距離之位置上來完成。 上述離加熱源122 —定距離之位置,其範圍離此位置從 10mm至50mm,其中加熱源122被提供在加熱源122之移動 方向的相對方向中。因此,直徑量測裝置124被提供在離加 熱源122從10mm至50mm之一位置上,其中加熱源122位在 加熱源122之移動方向的相對方向中。 40 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -------------------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043File: 5546piil.doc J \ t B7 V. Description of the invention (^ 1) The degree of variation of the example. FIG. 29 shows the relationship between the distance between the heating source 122 and the diameter measuring device 124 and the percentage change in the diameter of the glass rod 106. The change rate (%) of the diameter of the glass rod 106 represents (the largest diameter of the glass rod 106-the minimum diameter of the glass rod 106) / (average diameter) X 100. The diameter measuring device 124 of the second extension device 111 of the glass rod shown in FIG. 25 is provided at a position which is a certain distance from the heating source 122 from 10 mm to 50 mm. Therefore, the diameter of the glass rod 106 can be accurately measured, allowing the diameter of the glass rod 106 to be accurately controlled. When the glass rod 106 is extended, the position of the highest temperature of the glass rod 106 is slightly different from the position heated by the heating source 122 because the heating source 122 moves. In the position of the highest temperature of the glass rod 106, the extension speed per unit becomes the maximum. It is desirable to control the heating power of the heating source 122 and the moving speed of the movable clip 119 based on the diameter of the position of the maximum extension speed and the diameter target 値 '. The moving speed of the movable clip 119 is controlled based on the difference between the diameter target 値 and the diameter measured at the position of the maximum extension speed of the glass rod 106. This can be accomplished by providing a diameter measuring device 124 at a distance from the heating source 122. The above-mentioned position at a certain distance from the heating source 122 ranges from 10 mm to 50 mm from this position, wherein the heating source 122 is provided in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the heating source 122. Therefore, the diameter measuring device 124 is provided at a position from 10 mm to 50 mm from the heating source 122, wherein the heating source 122 is located in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the heating source 122. 40 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------------- Order --------- ( (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page.) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 517043

File:5546pii 1 .doc pj B7 五、發明說明(对) 假如用來加熱玻璃竿106之加熱源122是一氫氧噴燒 器,則供應至加熱源122之氫氣的流率被設定從30公升/分鐘 至500公升/分鐘。氫氣對氧氣之流率的比例被設定從1.5至 3.0。加熱源122之移動速度被控制在2mm/分與65 mm/分的 限制內◦假如氫氣的流率少於30公升/分鐘’則加熱量將會不 足,以及假如氫氣的流率多於500公升/分鐘’則燃料將會浪 費。假如氫氣對氧氣之流率的比例在上述之範圍外’由於加 熱量變的不足,此時將難以延長玻璃竿106。 假如用來加熱玻璃竿106之加熱源122是一丙烷氣體噴 燒器,則供應至加熱源I22之丙烷氣體的流率被設定從1公 升/分鐘至15公升/分鐘。丙院氣體對氧氣之流率的比例被設 定從0.1至0.3。加熱源122之移動速度被控制在2mm/分與65 mm/分的限制內。假如丙烷氣體的流率少於1公升/分鐘’則 加熱量將會不足,以及假如丙烷氣體的流率多於15公升/分 鐘,則燃料將會浪費。此外,假如丙烷氣體對氧氣之流率的 比例在上述之範圍外,由於加熱量變的不足,此時將難以延 長玻璃竿106。加熱源122之移動速度較佳是被控制在2mm/ 分與65 mm/分的限制內。假如加熱源122之移動速度低於 2mm/分,則需用較多的時間來延長玻璃竿106 ◦相對地,假 如加熱源122之移動速度高於65mm/分,由於加熱玻璃竿106 至其中心部分的速度太快,此時將難以延長玻璃竿1〇6。 (範例1) 經由設定加熱源122與直徑量測裝置124間之距離爲 15mm,開始玻璃竿106之延長。在玻璃竿106之延長期間, 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -------------------^ 訂、— (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 線% 517043 A7File: 5546pii 1 .doc pj B7 V. Description of the Invention (Yes) If the heating source 122 used to heat the glass rod 106 is a hydrogen-oxygen burner, the flow rate of hydrogen supplied to the heating source 122 is set from 30 liters / Minute to 500 liters / minute. The ratio of hydrogen to oxygen flow rate is set from 1.5 to 3.0. The moving speed of the heating source 122 is controlled within the limits of 2mm / min and 65mm / min. If the hydrogen flow rate is less than 30 liters / minute ', the heating capacity will be insufficient, and if the hydrogen flow rate is more than 500 liters / Minute 'then fuel will be wasted. If the ratio of the flow rate of hydrogen to oxygen is outside the above range ', it will be difficult to extend the glass rod 106 at this time due to insufficient heating. If the heating source 122 used to heat the glass rod 106 is a propane gas burner, the flow rate of the propane gas supplied to the heating source I22 is set from 1 liter / minute to 15 liter / minute. The ratio of the gas flow rate of C-house gas to oxygen was set from 0.1 to 0.3. The moving speed of the heating source 122 is controlled within the limits of 2 mm / min and 65 mm / min. If the flow rate of the propane gas is less than 1 liter / minute ', the heating amount will be insufficient, and if the flow rate of the propane gas is more than 15 liters / minute, the fuel will be wasted. In addition, if the ratio of the flow rate of propane gas to oxygen is outside the above range, it is difficult to extend the glass rod 106 at this time because the heating amount becomes insufficient. The moving speed of the heating source 122 is preferably controlled within the limits of 2 mm / min and 65 mm / min. If the moving speed of the heating source 122 is lower than 2mm / min, it will take more time to extend the glass rod 106. Conversely, if the moving speed of the heating source 122 is higher than 65mm / minute, because the heating glass rod 106 is to its center The speed of the part is too fast, and it will be difficult to extend the glass rod 106 at this time. (Example 1) By setting the distance between the heating source 122 and the diameter measuring device 124 to 15 mm, the extension of the glass rod 106 is started. During the extension of the glass rod 106, this paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------------- ^ Order,- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Line% 517043 A7

File:5 546pii 1 .doc ___B7 ___ 五、發明說明(^) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 依據玻璃竿106之量測直徑與目標直徑間的差異,控制加熱 源122與尾端支撐架116之移動速度。加熱源I22之燃燒狀 況被設定包括氫氣之流率在2〗4公升/分鐘,氫氣對氧氣之流 率的比例爲2·5,以及加熱源122之移動速度爲11mm/分。玻 璃竿106之直徑的變動率在延長過程後爲0.9%。 (範例2) 設定加熱源122與直徑量測裝置124間之距離爲40mm。 氫氣之流率設定爲199公升/分鐘。氫氣對氧氣之流率的比例 設定爲2.5。加熱源122之移動速度設定爲13mm/分。玻璃竿 106之直徑的變動率在延長過程後爲0.6%。 (比較的範例1) 設定加熱源122與直徑量測裝置124間之距離爲5mm。 氫氣之流率設定爲209公升/分鐘。氫氣對氧氣之流率的比例 設定爲2·5。加熱源122之移動速度設定爲12mm/分。因爲加 熱源122與直徑量測裝置124間之距離太接近, 玻璃竿106之直徑的變動率在延長過程後爲3.7%。此大於上 述範例1與範例2之變動率。 ^ (比較的範例2) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 設定加熱源122與直徑量測裝置124間之距離爲60mm。 氫氣之流率設定爲237公升/分鐘。氫氣對氧氣之流率的比例 設定爲2·5。加熱源丨22之移動速度設定爲l〇mm/分。因爲加 熱源Π2與直徑量測裝置124間之距離太遠, 玻璃竿106之直徑的變動率在延長過程後爲2.5%。此變動率 大於上述範例1與範例2之變動率。 42 紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043File: 5 546pii 1 .doc ___B7 ___ 5. Description of the Invention (^) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) According to the difference between the measured diameter of the glass rod 106 and the target diameter, control the heating source 122 and The moving speed of the end support 116. The combustion condition of the heating source I22 was set to include a hydrogen flow rate of 2 to 4 liters / minute, a ratio of hydrogen to oxygen flow rate of 2.5, and a moving speed of the heating source 122 to 11 mm / min. The change rate of the diameter of the glass rod 106 was 0.9% after the extension process. (Example 2) The distance between the heating source 122 and the diameter measuring device 124 is set to 40 mm. The flow rate of hydrogen was set at 199 liters / minute. The ratio of hydrogen to oxygen flow rate is set to 2.5. The moving speed of the heating source 122 is set to 13 mm / min. The rate of change in the diameter of the glass rod 106 was 0.6% after the extension process. (Comparative Example 1) The distance between the heating source 122 and the diameter measuring device 124 was set to 5 mm. The flow rate of hydrogen was set at 209 liters / minute. The ratio of hydrogen to oxygen flow rate is set to 2.5. The moving speed of the heating source 122 is set to 12 mm / min. Because the distance between the heating source 122 and the diameter measuring device 124 is too close, the rate of change in the diameter of the glass rod 106 after the extension process is 3.7%. This is greater than the rate of change of Examples 1 and 2 above. ^ (Comparative example 2) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy Set the distance between the heating source 122 and the diameter measuring device 124 to 60 mm. The flow rate of hydrogen was set at 237 liters / minute. The ratio of hydrogen to oxygen flow rate is set to 2.5. The moving speed of the heating source 22 was set to 10 mm / min. Because the distance between the heating source Π2 and the diameter measuring device 124 is too far, the variation rate of the diameter of the glass rod 106 after the extension process is 2.5%. This rate of change is greater than the rate of change of Examples 1 and 2 above. 42 Paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 Public Love) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 517043

File:5546pii 1 - doc 幻 ---SI---- 五、發明說明(伸) (比較的範例3) 設定加熱源122與直徑量測裝置124間之距離爲15mm。 氫氣之流率設定爲215公升/分鐘。氫氣對氧氣之流率的比例 設定爲1.0。加熱源122之移動速度設定爲12mm/分。因爲氫 氣對氧氣之流率的比例爲1.0,其小於建議的最小値丨·5 ’故 坡璃竿106無法被延長。 (比較的範例4) 設定加熱源122與直徑量測裝置124間之距離爲15mm。 氫氣之流率設定爲195公升/分鐘。氫氣對氧氣之流率的比例 設定爲4.0 ◦加熱源122之移動速度設定爲13mm/分。因爲氫 氣對氧氣之流率的比例爲4.0,其大於建議的最大値3.0,故 坡璃竿106無法被延長。 (比較的範例5) 設定加熱源122與直徑量測裝置124間之距離爲15mm。 氫氣之流率設定爲2〇4公升/分鐘。氫氣對氧氣之流率的比例 5又疋爲2·5。加熱源122之移動速度設定爲70mm/分。因爲加 熱源I22之移動速度爲7〇mm/分,其大於建議的最大移動速 度65mm/分,故玻璃竿106無法被延長。 第3〇圖繪示的是玻璃竿第二延長裝置的架構圖,其 具有一張力量測裝置282被提供在第25圖所示玻璃竿第二延 長裝置111上之架構。玻璃竿第二延長裝置1U具有一張力 量測裝置282 ’用以量測供應至位於可移動卡夾119上之玻璃 竿1〇6的張力。 玻璃竿第二延長裝置111使用移動支架編碼器272,可 43 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公釐)"~ --— -------------------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) 517043File: 5546pii 1-doc Magic --- SI ---- 5. Explanation of the invention (extension) (Comparative example 3) Set the distance between the heating source 122 and the diameter measuring device 124 to 15mm. The flow rate of hydrogen was set at 215 liters / minute. The ratio of hydrogen to oxygen flow rate is set to 1.0. The moving speed of the heating source 122 is set to 12 mm / min. Because the ratio of the flow rate of hydrogen to oxygen is 1.0, which is less than the recommended minimum 値 ·· 5 ', the slope rod 106 cannot be extended. (Comparative Example 4) The distance between the heating source 122 and the diameter measuring device 124 was set to 15 mm. The flow rate of hydrogen was set at 195 liters / minute. The ratio of the flow rate of hydrogen to oxygen is set to 4.0. The moving speed of the heating source 122 is set to 13 mm / min. Because the ratio of hydrogen to oxygen flow rate is 4.0, which is greater than the recommended maximum 値 3.0, the sloped pole 106 cannot be extended. (Comparative Example 5) The distance between the heating source 122 and the diameter measuring device 124 was set to 15 mm. The flow rate of hydrogen was set at 204 liters / minute. The ratio of hydrogen to oxygen flow rate 5 is again 2.5. The moving speed of the heating source 122 is set to 70 mm / min. Because the moving speed of the heating source I22 is 70 mm / min, which is greater than the recommended maximum moving speed of 65 mm / min, the glass rod 106 cannot be extended. FIG. 30 shows a structure diagram of the second extension device of the glass rod, which has a structure in which a force measuring device 282 is provided on the second extension device 111 of the glass rod shown in FIG. The glass rod second extension device 1U has a force measuring device 282 'for measuring the tension of the glass rod 106 supplied to the movable clip 119. The second extension device of the glass rod 111 uses a moving bracket encoder 272, which can be used for 43 paper sizes in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (21〇X 297 mm) " ~ --- -------- ----------- Order --------- (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) 517043

File:5 546piiId〇C A7 B7 五、發明說明(朽) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 偵測位於移動支架120上之加熱源122的位置。張力量測裝 置282連接至控制單元280。控制單元280依據來自張力量測 裝置282提供之玻璃竿106的張力,控制尾端支撐架116之 移動速度。這會一直進行,直到加熱源122之移動距離到達 一規定距離爲止。 第31圖繪示的是第26圖之延長過程(S154)的詳細流程 圖。首先,預加熱玻璃竿1〇6直到玻璃竿106之規定區域被 加熱源122融化與軟化爲止。此將允許延長玻璃竿106 (S132)。接著,位於移動支架120上之加熱源122會經由移動 支架120被移動。在早期延長階段中,加熱源122之移動速 度理想是盡可能的慢,以便使玻璃竿1〇6之直徑的變動可被 減小。加熱源122之移動也可以是一定速度。供應至加熱源 122之氣體數量可以是定量。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 接著,控制尾端支撐架116之移動速度’使得經由張力 量測裝置282量測之玻璃竿106的張力大體上位在穩定狀態 下張力之平均値80%至110%內(S136)。此穩定狀態將解釋於 下。尾端支撐架Π6之移動速度最初依據沿著軸線方向之玻 璃竿106的複數個位置之直徑被設定,並依據玻璃竿1〇6的 張力重新設定。玻璃竿106會被上述張力負載所延長,直到 加熱源大體上移動50mm至150mm (S138)。 假如控制單元280偵測到加熱源122大體上已移動從 50mm至150mm (S138),則尾端支撐架116之移動速度改變 至在穩定狀態下之速度,其將解釋於下。此可經由控制尾端 支撐架驅動編碼器273來完成(S140)。在玻璃竿106之延長期 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) A7 517043File: 5 546piiId〇C A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (dead) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Detect the position of the heating source 122 on the mobile stand 120. The tension measurement device 282 is connected to the control unit 280. The control unit 280 controls the moving speed of the tail end support frame 116 according to the tension of the glass rod 106 provided from the tension measuring device 282. This is continued until the moving distance of the heating source 122 reaches a prescribed distance. Fig. 31 shows a detailed flowchart of the extension process (S154) of Fig. 26. First, the glass rod 106 is preheated until a predetermined area of the glass rod 106 is melted and softened by the heating source 122. This will allow the glass rod 106 to be extended (S132). Then, the heating source 122 located on the moving support 120 is moved through the moving support 120. In the early extension stage, it is desirable that the moving speed of the heating source 122 is as slow as possible so that the variation in the diameter of the glass rod 106 can be reduced. The movement of the heating source 122 may be a certain speed. The amount of gas supplied to the heating source 122 may be quantitative. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Next, control the movement speed of the tail end support 116 to make the tension of the glass rod 106 measured by the tension measurement device 282 roughly in the stable state. The average tension is 80% to Within 110% (S136). This steady state will be explained below. The movement speed of the tail end support frame Π6 is initially set based on the diameters of a plurality of positions of the glass rod 106 along the axis direction, and reset according to the tension of the glass rod 106. The glass rod 106 is extended by the above-mentioned tension load until the heating source moves approximately 50 mm to 150 mm (S138). If the control unit 280 detects that the heating source 122 has generally moved from 50 mm to 150 mm (S138), the moving speed of the tail end support frame 116 is changed to a speed in a steady state, which will be explained below. This can be done by controlling the encoder 273 by driving the tail support (S140). In the extension period of glass rod 106, this paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) A7 517043

File:5 5 46piil.doc ____B7____ 五、發明說明UZ ) 間,直徑量測裝置124量測玻璃竿106之直徑(Sl42)。·當玻璃 竿106被延長至想要的直徑與長度時,完成玻璃竿106之延 長(S144)。 在穩定狀態下之速度是在延長前之材質平衡與在延長平 衡後之速度。在此,玻璃竿106之最初直徑在延長前以Di代 表,獲得之目標直徑以D2代表,加熱源122之移動速度以Vi 代表,以及玻璃竿106之延長速度以V2代表。 舉例來說,假定延長僅在加熱區域發生,如此加熱區域 與延長是十分的小。當下列方程式是有效時,V2相當於在穩 定狀態下之速度。 因此,依據〇1與D2調整V,與尾端支撐架116之移動速 度可設定V2。在穩定狀態下玻璃竿106之張力,是當玻璃竿 106被移動在穩定狀態之速度之尾端支撐架116延長時的速 度。 第32圖繪示的是在玻璃竿106之延長期間,直徑變動的 過程圖。當加熱時,玻璃竿106軟化。如第32(1)圖所示,僅 經由預加熱延長,可能會發生玻璃竿1〇6無法被足夠軟化的 情形。當加熱源122與尾端支撐架116在規定速度下開始移 動時,玻璃竿106上所產生之張力會從兩倍正常張力增加至 三倍正常張力。接著,預加熱之區域會被快速地延長,以及 預加熱之直徑會被縮減至如第32(2)圖所示之陰影部分。玻璃 竿106之延長幾乎整個發生在預加熱區域,此區域會被加熱 源122再度加熱並小量延長。因此,直徑之頸部會發生在玻 45 ^紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) "" -------------------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043 :ile:5546piil.doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(以) 璃竿106上,如第32(3)圖所示。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 玻璃竿106之直徑的變動易於發生在從玻璃竿106之延 長的開始場所至離開始場所50mm之場所的區域。假如延長 比此場所更進步,提供熱度至玻璃竿106之玻璃竿106軟化 速度,以及玻璃竿106之延長速度會被平衡至一穩定狀態。 因此,玻璃竿106之直徑的變動將不會發生,如第32(4)圖所 不0 玻璃竿106可經由控制尾端支撐架116之移動速度被延 長。此瞄準(aim)用以維持在早期延長階段之玻璃竿106的張 力大體上在110%,或小於在穩定狀態中之張力的平均値。在 玻璃竿106之早期延長階段之直徑的變動,可因此被減小。 此乃因爲供應至玻璃竿106之熱度、玻璃竿106之軟化速度 及玻璃竿106之延長速度可被平衡。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 假如在早期延長階段中玻璃竿106的張力低於80%穩定 狀態,則玻璃竿1〇6之直徑要到達目標値的距離需要變長。 因此,可被用來做爲產品之延長的玻璃竿106之區域變短。 如此減少生產過程之產量因素及增加玻璃竿106到達目標直 徑的時間。因此,想要的是,控制早期延長階段中玻璃竿 的張力,大體上在穩定狀態中從80%至110%平均値的範圍。 第33圖繪示的是依照第31圖之延長過程(S154),玻璃 竿106被延長的過程圖。首先,如第33(1)與(2)圖所不,在玻 璃竿106之預加熱後,加熱源122與尾端支撐架116開始移 動,以開始玻璃竿丨〇6之延長。由於玻璃竿106之張力被控 制在110%或小於穩定狀態下之張力,過度的張力不會被供應 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043 FMe;5 546piil-d〇c A7 B7 五、發明說明(«) 至玻璃竿106。由於快速的延長,故不會有頸部發生在玻璃竿 106上。假如加熱源122在此平衡狀況下移動規定距離,則供 應至玻璃竿106之熱度、玻璃竿106之軟化速度及玻璃竿106 之延長速度會被平衡。因此,玻璃竿106之直徑的變動可被 防止。 假如依據張力來持續控制尾端支撐架116之移動速度, 直徑的變動可能會發生。玻璃竿106之張力將會隨著加熱源 122提供之熱量的小量改變而變化。尾端支撐架116之移動速 度接著變動,以維持玻璃竿1〇6之張力在一定値,造成延長 的玻璃竿106之直徑的變動。因此,在開始延長上加熱源122 移動一規定距離之後,經由微妙的張力變動所造成玻璃竿106 之直徑的變動,可經由改變尾端支撐架116之移動速度成穩 定狀態之速度來防止。直到加熱源122移動從開始延長點移 動50mm爲止,供應至玻璃竿106之熱度、玻璃竿1〇6之軟 化速度及玻璃竿1〇6之延長速度不會被平衡。此結果爲,在 加熱源122移動50mm之前,假如延長速度被改變成在穩定 狀態之速度,由於直徑的變動,玻璃竿106之頸部將會發生。 玻璃竿106之張力因此需被控制在大體上110%或小於穩定狀 態,直到加熱源122大體上移動50mm爲止。想要的是,在 加熱源I22移動多於大體上150mm之前,改變尾端支撐架116 之移動速度成穩定狀態之速度。 (範例) 玻璃竿106會經由玻璃竿第二延長裝置ill被延長。玻 璃竿106具有65mm之外部直徑與980mm之長度。虛擬竿1〇8 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -------------------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043 FMe:5 546piild〇C A7 _ B7_____ 五、發明說明(从) 具有60mm之外部直徑與25〇mm之長度,其被鎔接在玻璃竿 106之兩端上◦在玻璃竿106與虛擬竿108之鎔接期間,環繞 軸線之旋轉速度爲30rpm。一氫氧噴燒器被用來做爲加熱源 122。提供至加熱源122之氧氣與氫氣分別爲96公升/分與240 公升/分。 在玻璃竿106之預加熱後,經由移動加熱源122在一移 動速度爲12.4mm/分下,開始玻璃竿106之延長。當延長玻璃 竿106以縮減玻璃竿106之直徑從65mm至50mm時,在穩定 狀態中之張力大約爲lOOkgf/cm2,以及在穩定狀態中之尾端支 撐架116之移動速度爲8.6mm/分。控制尾端支撐架116之移 動速度,使得張力不會超過ll〇kgf/Cm2,直到加熱源122從延 長之開始點移動100mm爲止◦在加熱源122移動100mm之 後,經由控制尾端支撐架116之移動速度至8.6 mm/分來延長 玻璃竿106,其爲穩定狀態中之速度。 第34圖繪示的是在範例之早期延長階段,玻璃竿106之 張力的變動圖。垂直軸代表玻璃竿106產生之張力,以及水 平軸代表在延長開始之後,加熱源122之移動距離。當加熱 源122向前移動100mm時,在早期延長階段中玻璃竿106之 張力爲110 kgf/cm2或更小。 第36圖繪示的是在玻璃竿106之延長之後,玻璃竿106 之直徑的變動圖。垂直軸代表沿著玻璃竿106之輻射方向的 距離,以及水平軸代表沿著玻璃竿106之縱向的距離。玻璃 竿106會被依照具有少直徑變動例如頸部之範例的方法延 長,以及在延長開始之後,玻璃竿106之直徑可被縮減至大 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -------*1訂---------線泰 517043File: 5 5 46piil.doc ____B7____ 5. In the description of the invention, the diameter measuring device 124 measures the diameter of the glass rod 106 (Sl42). When the glass rod 106 is extended to a desired diameter and length, the glass rod 106 is extended (S144). The speed in the steady state is the material balance before the extension and the speed after the extension. Here, the initial diameter of the glass rod 106 is represented by Di before elongation, the obtained target diameter is represented by D2, the moving speed of the heating source 122 is represented by Vi, and the extension speed of the glass rod 106 is represented by V2. For example, suppose that the extension occurs only in the heated area, so that the heated area and extension are very small. When the following equation is valid, V2 is equivalent to the speed in a steady state. Therefore, V2 can be set by adjusting V according to 0 and D2, and the moving speed of the tail end support frame 116. The tension of the glass rod 106 in the steady state is the speed when the end support frame 116 of the glass rod 106 is moved at the speed at which the steady state is extended. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a diameter change process during the extension of the glass rod 106. FIG. When heated, the glass rod 106 softens. As shown in Fig. 32 (1), it may happen that the glass rod 106 cannot be sufficiently softened only by preheating. When the heating source 122 and the tail end support frame 116 start moving at a predetermined speed, the tension generated on the glass rod 106 will increase from twice the normal tension to three times the normal tension. Then, the pre-heated area will be quickly extended, and the pre-heated diameter will be reduced to the shaded portion shown in Figure 32 (2). The extension of the glass rod 106 occurs almost entirely in the pre-heated area, which is reheated by the heating source 122 and extended a small amount. Therefore, the diameter of the neck will occur on the glass 45 ^ paper size applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) " " ---------------- --- Order --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 517043: ile: 5546piil.doc A7 B7 V. Description of Invention ( To) on the glass rod 106, as shown in Figure 32 (3). (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page.) The diameter of the glass rod 106 can easily change from the extended starting location of the glass rod 106 to a location 50mm away from the starting location. If the extension is more advanced than this place, the glass rod 106 providing heat to the glass rod 106 is softened and the extension speed of the glass rod 106 will be balanced to a stable state. Therefore, the diameter change of the glass rod 106 will not occur, as shown in Fig. 32 (4). The glass rod 106 can be extended by controlling the moving speed of the tail support frame 116. This aim is to maintain the tension of the glass rod 106 at the early extension stage to be approximately 110%, or less than the average tension of the tension in the steady state. Variations in diameter during the early extension phase of the glass rod 106 can therefore be reduced. This is because the heat supplied to the glass rod 106, the softening speed of the glass rod 106, and the extension speed of the glass rod 106 can be balanced. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. If the tension of the glass rod 106 is lower than 80% during the early extension stage, the distance between the diameter of the glass rod 106 and the target 値 needs to be longer. Therefore, the area of the extended glass rod 106 that can be used as a product is shortened. This reduces the yield factor of the production process and increases the time it takes for the glass rod 106 to reach the target diameter. Therefore, it is desirable to control the tension of the glass rods during the early elongation period, generally in the steady state range from 80% to 110%. Fig. 33 shows a process of extending the glass rod 106 according to the extension process (S154) of Fig. 31. First, as shown in Figs. 33 (1) and (2), after the preheating of the glass rod 106, the heating source 122 and the tail end support frame 116 begin to move to start the extension of the glass rod. Since the tension of the glass rod 106 is controlled at 110% or less than the steady state tension, the excessive tension will not be supplied. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the employee consumer cooperative 517043 FMe; 5 546piil-d〇c A7 B7 V. Description of invention («) to glass rod 106. Due to the rapid extension, no neck will occur on the glass rod 106. If the heating source 122 moves a predetermined distance under this equilibrium condition, the heat supplied to the glass rod 106, the softening speed of the glass rod 106, and the extension speed of the glass rod 106 will be balanced. Therefore, variations in the diameter of the glass rod 106 can be prevented. If the moving speed of the tail end support 116 is continuously controlled according to the tension, a change in the diameter may occur. The tension of the glass rod 106 will change as the amount of heat provided by the heating source 122 changes. The moving speed of the tail end support frame 116 is then changed to maintain the tension of the glass rod 106 at a certain level, resulting in a change in the diameter of the extended glass rod 106. Therefore, after starting to extend the upper heating source 122 to move a predetermined distance, a change in the diameter of the glass rod 106 caused by a delicate tension change can be prevented by changing the speed of the tail end support frame 116 to a stable state. Until the heating source 122 moves 50 mm from the start extension point, the heat supplied to the glass rod 106, the softening speed of the glass rod 106, and the extending speed of the glass rod 106 will not be balanced. As a result, if the elongation speed is changed to a steady state speed before the heating source 122 moves 50 mm, the neck of the glass rod 106 will occur due to the change in diameter. Therefore, the tension of the glass rod 106 needs to be controlled at about 110% or less, until the heating source 122 moves about 50 mm. It is desirable to change the moving speed of the tail end support frame 116 to a steady state speed before the heating source I22 moves more than approximately 150 mm. (Example) The glass rod 106 is extended by the glass rod second extension device ill. The glass rod 106 has an outer diameter of 65 mm and a length of 980 mm. Virtual pole 108 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------------- Order ------ --- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 517043 FMe: 5 546piild〇C A7 _ B7_____ 5. Description of the invention (from) It has an outer diameter of 60mm and a diameter of 25 The length of 0 mm is connected to both ends of the glass rod 106. During the connection between the glass rod 106 and the virtual rod 108, the rotation speed around the axis is 30 rpm. A hydrogen-oxygen burner is used as the heating source 122. The oxygen and hydrogen supplied to the heating source 122 were 96 liters / minute and 240 liters / minute, respectively. After the glass rod 106 is pre-heated, the glass rod 106 is extended by a moving heating source 122 at a moving speed of 12.4 mm / min. When the glass rod 106 is extended to reduce the diameter of the glass rod 106 from 65 mm to 50 mm, the tension in the steady state is about 100 kgf / cm2, and the moving speed of the tail end support 116 in the steady state is 8.6 mm / min. Control the moving speed of the tail end support frame 116 so that the tension will not exceed 110 kgf / Cm2 until the heating source 122 moves 100 mm from the extension start point. After the heating source 122 moves 100 mm, control the tail end support frame 116 by The moving speed is 8.6 mm / min to extend the glass rod 106, which is the speed in a steady state. Figure 34 is a graph showing the change in the tension of the glass rod 106 during the early extension phase of the example. The vertical axis represents the tension generated by the glass rod 106, and the horizontal axis represents the moving distance of the heating source 122 after the start of the extension. When the heating source 122 is moved forward by 100 mm, the tension of the glass rod 106 during the early extension phase is 110 kgf / cm2 or less. FIG. 36 is a graph showing a change in the diameter of the glass rod 106 after the glass rod 106 is extended. The vertical axis represents the distance along the radiation direction of the glass rod 106, and the horizontal axis represents the distance along the longitudinal direction of the glass rod 106. The glass rod 106 will be extended according to the method with a small diameter variation such as the neck, and after the extension starts, the diameter of the glass rod 106 can be reduced to a large paper size. Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) ------- * 1 order --------- line Thai 517043

File: 5546piil.doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(ψίο (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 約縱向距離爲100mm之目標直徑◦在此區域中玻璃竿106之 直徑的準確度會經由範例的方法,在穩定狀態之速度中被延 長,其與經由傳統延長方法延長玻璃竿106之直徑有大約相 同的準確度。 (比較的範例) 具有65mm之直徑的玻璃竿1〇6會被延長至50mm之直 徑◦移動速度之狀況與供應至加熱源122之氣體數量與上述 範例相同◦從延長開始之後,經由控制尾端支撐架Π6之移 動速度至8·6 mm/分來延長玻璃竿1〇6。此爲穩定狀態中之速 度。 第35圖繪示的是在比較的範例之早期延長階段,玻璃竿 106之張力的變動圖。垂直軸代表玻璃竿1〇6產生之張力,以 及水平軸代表在延長開始之後,加熱源U2之移動距離。在 早期延長階段中,玻璃竿1〇6之張力被增加至300 kgf/cm2, 其三倍於穩定狀態之張力。此會在加熱源122移動起始100mm 時發生。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 如第36圖所示,在比較的範例之延長後,玻璃竿106比 開始延長時具有約10〇111111之大頸部。因爲波動連續直到比開 始延長時約300mm爲止’此區域不能被用作爲產品’以及產 率會減低。 第37圖繪示的是第26圖之尾端拉出過程(S158)的詳細 流程圖。首先,偵測被尾端拉出之玻璃竿106的位置(S169) ° 接著,經由加熱源122之火焰預加熱玻璃竿106之規定區域 (S170),直到此規定區域幾乎軟化爲止。然後’經由加熱源 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) 517043File: 5546piil.doc A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) The target diameter is about 100mm in the longitudinal distance. The accuracy of the diameter of the glass rod 106 in this area will be determined by example. The method is extended in the steady state speed, which has approximately the same accuracy as that of extending the diameter of the glass rod 106 by the conventional extension method. (Comparative example) A glass rod 106 having a diameter of 65 mm will be extended to The diameter of 50mm. The condition of the moving speed and the amount of gas supplied to the heating source 122 are the same as the above example. After the extension is started, the glass rod 1 is extended by controlling the moving speed of the tail end support Π6 to 8.6 mm / min. 6. This is the speed in the steady state. Figure 35 shows the tension change of the glass rod 106 in the early extension stage of the comparative example. The vertical axis represents the tension generated by the glass rod 106 and the horizontal axis. Represents the moving distance of the heating source U2 after the start of the extension. In the early extension stage, the tension of the glass rod 10 was increased to 300 kgf / cm2, which is three times the steady state tension. This will happen when the heating source 122 moves to the first 100 mm. As shown in Figure 36, printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, after the comparison example is extended, the glass rod 106 has about 10% longer than when it was initially extended. The large neck of 111111. Because the wave continues until it is about 300mm longer than the beginning of the extension, 'This area cannot be used as a product' and the yield will be reduced. Figure 37 shows the drawing process at the end of Figure 26 (S158 ) Detailed flow chart. First, the position of the glass rod 106 pulled out at the tail end is detected (S169) ° Then, a predetermined area (S170) of the glass rod 106 is pre-heated by the flame of the heating source 122 until the specified area is almost Until softening. Then the paper size is applied to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 mm) via a heating source 517043

File:5 546piild〇C A7 B7 五、發明說明(Μ) 122與移動尾端支撐架116,加熱玻璃竿106之規定區域來延 長玻璃竿106,使得此規定區域之直徑被縮減(S172)。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 加熱源122從規定區域之中心朝著玻璃竿106之中間面 的方向移動◦接著,加熱源122以火焰第二加熱玻璃竿1〇6 (S174)。此火焰之濃度小於預加熱之火焰的濃度(S170)。玻璃 竿106之規定區域更經由移動尾端支撐架116被延長,使得 規定區域之直徑被縮減(S176)。然後,玻璃竿106之規定區域 會被此火焰所融化。再一次此火焰之濃度小於預加熱之火焰 的濃度(S170)。 第38圖繪示的是切口 284的示意圖,其被提供做爲一標 記位在介於玻璃竿106與虛擬竿108間之連接上。此允許在 第37圖所示之尾端拉出位置偵測過程(S169)中,偵測尾端拉 出之位置。一標記被提供在介於玻璃竿106與虛擬竿108間 之連接上。認知標記之裝置被安裝在玻璃竿第二延長裝置111 上,用以偵測標記之位置。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 尾端拉出過程之開始位置係依據偵測的標記位置來設 定。玻璃竿106之延長過程在設定尾端拉出開始位置中完成, 並在相同時間中開始玻璃竿106之尾端拉出過程。當認知 (recognizes)標記之裝置是一直徑量測之裝置時,如第38圖所 示之方法會被使用。 第39圖繪示的是螢光塗料(fluorescent paint)287的示意 圖,其被用在介於玻璃竿106與虛擬竿108間之連接上,以 做爲標記之另一範例。當認知標記之裝置是一影像處理裝置 時,如第39圖所示之方法會被使用。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 517043 A7File: 5 546piild0C A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (M) 122 and moving end support 116, heating the specified area of the glass rod 106 to extend the glass rod 106, so that the diameter of the specified area is reduced (S172). (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page.) The heating source 122 moves from the center of the specified area toward the middle surface of the glass rod 106. Next, the heating source 122 heats the glass rod 106 with a flame second (S174 ). The concentration of this flame is smaller than that of the pre-heated flame (S170). The specified area of the glass rod 106 is further extended by the moving tail end support frame 116, so that the diameter of the specified area is reduced (S176). The prescribed area of the glass rod 106 will then be melted by this flame. Again, the concentration of this flame is less than the concentration of the preheated flame (S170). Fig. 38 shows a schematic view of the cutout 284, which is provided as a mark on the connection between the glass rod 106 and the virtual rod 108. This allows the tail-end pulled-out position detection process (S169) shown in Figure 37 to detect the tail-end pulled-out position. A marker is provided on the connection between the glass rod 106 and the virtual rod 108. The device for recognizing the mark is installed on the second extension device 111 of the glass rod to detect the position of the mark. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The starting position of the tail end pull-out process is set based on the detected marker position. The extension process of the glass rod 106 is completed in setting the tail end pull-out start position, and the tail rod pull-out process of the glass rod 106 is started at the same time. When the recognition device is a diameter measurement device, the method shown in Fig. 38 is used. Fig. 39 shows a schematic view of a fluorescent paint 287, which is used for the connection between the glass rod 106 and the virtual rod 108 as another example of marking. When the device for cognitive marker is an image processing device, the method shown in Fig. 39 is used. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 517043 A7

File:5546piil .doc 五、發明說明(你) 第40圖繪示的是在尾端拉出位置偵測過程(S169)中,偵 測切口 284之玻璃竿第二延長裝置111的示意圖◦首先,虛 擬竿108被錯接在玻璃竿106之兩端上◦具有虛擬竿108在 其兩端上之玻璃竿106被固定在固定卡夾118與可移動卡夾 119上,圖中未顯示。具有3mm深之切口 284被提供環繞此 鎔接位置。此鎔接位置從玻璃竿106與虛擬幸108間之連接 造成。 在玻璃竿106之延長期間,直徑量測裝置124量測玻璃 竿106之直徑。當直徑量測裝置124經由偵測玻璃竿106之 直徑變化來量測切口 284之位置時,玻璃竿第二延長裝置111 開始尾端拉出過程。尾端拉出之開始位置稍微朝著從玻璃竿 106與虛擬竿108間連接之玻璃竿106的中間方向。而且,尾 端拉出之開始位置不會有氣泡或具有直徑爲〇.3mm或以上之 氣泡。接著,過程從延長移至尾端拉出過程。 當標記是一印記287時,螢光塗料被用在玻璃竿106與 虛擬竿108間之連接上。影像處理裝置之照相機可偵測被安 裝在直徑量測裝置124之位置上的螢光塗料,其中直徑量測 裝置124被安裝在移動支架120上。在玻璃竿106之延長期 間,此照相機會處理玻璃竿1〇6之圖樣。假如照相機偵測螢 光塗料,則玻璃竿第二延長裝置111開始尾端拉出過程。尾 端拉出之開始位置稍微朝著從玻璃竿1〇6與虛擬竿108間連 接之玻璃竿106的中間方向。而且,開始尾端拉出之位置不 會有氣泡或具有直徑爲〇.3mm或以上之氣泡。接著,過程從 延長移至尾端拉出過程。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -------------------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043File: 5546piil.doc V. Description of the Invention (You) Figure 40 shows the schematic diagram of the second extension device 111 of the glass rod that detects the cutout 284 during the tail position detection process (S169). First, The virtual rod 108 is staggered on both ends of the glass rod 106. The glass rod 106 with the virtual rod 108 on both ends is fixed to the fixed clip 118 and the movable clip 119, not shown in the figure. A 3mm deep incision 284 is provided to surround this joint position. This connection position is caused by the connection between the glass rod 106 and the virtual Fortune 108. During the extension of the glass rod 106, the diameter measuring device 124 measures the diameter of the glass rod 106. When the diameter measuring device 124 measures the position of the cutout 284 by detecting the change in the diameter of the glass rod 106, the second extension device 111 of the glass rod starts the tail-end drawing process. The starting position of the tail end pull-out is slightly toward the middle of the glass rod 106 connected between the glass rod 106 and the virtual rod 108. Moreover, there will be no bubbles or bubbles with a diameter of 0.3 mm or more at the beginning of the tail end pull-out. Next, the process moves from extended to tail-end pull-out process. When the mark is a mark 287, a fluorescent paint is applied to the connection between the glass rod 106 and the virtual rod 108. The camera of the image processing device can detect the fluorescent paint installed on the position of the diameter measuring device 124, and the diameter measuring device 124 is installed on the moving bracket 120. During the extension of the glass rod 106, the camera processes the pattern of the glass rod 106. If the camera detects the fluorescent paint, the second extension device 111 of the glass rod starts the tail-end drawing process. The starting position of the tail end pull-out is slightly toward the middle of the glass rod 106 connected from the glass rod 106 to the virtual rod 108. Further, there is no bubble or a bubble having a diameter of 0.3 mm or more at the position where the tail end is pulled out at the beginning. The process then moves from extended to tail-end and out of the process. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------------- Order --------- (Please (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 517043

File:5546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(yp (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) 第41圖繪示的是在第37圖所示流程圖之玻璃竿106之 尾端拉出過程期間,在偵測尾端拉出之位置後(S169),加熱源 122與尾部支撐台116的移動圖。在用以尾端拉出之預加熱過 程中(S170),加熱源122之火焰加熱玻璃竿106之規定區域, 直到玻璃竿106幾乎軟化爲止。在用以尾端拉出之延長過程 中(SH2),加熱源122加熱玻璃竿106之規定區域,並且尾部 支撐台116延長玻璃竿1〇6之規定區域。如此縮減此規定區 域之直徑。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 在第二加熱過程中(S174),尾部支撐台116停止,並且 加熱源122會從規定區域之中心,朝著玻璃竿1〇6之區域的 中間面移動(至圖中左邊)。接著,加熱源122以火焰加熱玻璃 竿1〇6,其濃度小於預加熱之火焰的濃度(S170)。在用以尾端 拉出之第二延長過程中(S176),加熱源122更移動至圖中之左 邊,並加熱玻璃竿106。尾部支撐台116也會移動,以延長玻 璃竿106之規定區域。在用以尾端拉出之融化過程中(S178), 加熱源122以火焰加熱玻璃竿106,其濃度小於預加熱之火焰 的濃度(S170)。加熱源122之位置是在相同位置如同用以尾端 拉出之第二延長過程中(S176)。尾部支撐台116移動以融化玻 璃竿106。 第42圖繪示的是在第37圖之尾端拉出過程(S158)中, 尾端拉出過程之另一方法的設定範例。此方法依據玻璃竿106 之尾端拉出過程的進行時間,控制氣體數量、加熱源122之 移動距離及尾部支撐台116之移動速度。 氣體數量、加熱源122之移動距離及尾部支撐台116之 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 517043File: 5546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (yp (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) Figure 41 shows the end of the glass rod 106 in the flowchart shown in Figure 37 During the end pull-out process, after detecting the position where the tail end is pulled out (S169), the movement diagram of the heating source 122 and the tail support base 116. During the pre-heating process for the tail end pull-out (S170), the heating source The flame of 122 heats the specified area of the glass rod 106 until the glass rod 106 is almost softened. During the extension process (SH2) with the tail end pulled out, the heating source 122 heats the specified area of the glass rod 106, and the tail support platform 116 Extend the specified area of the glass rod 106. In this way, reduce the diameter of this specified area. In the second heating process (S174), printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the tail support 116 stops, and the heating source 122 will start from The center of the specified area is moved toward the middle surface of the area of the glass rod 106 (to the left in the figure). Then, the heating source 122 heats the glass rod 106 with a flame, the concentration of which is less than the concentration of the pre-heated flame (S170 ). Pull out at the end During the second extension process (S176), the heating source 122 moves to the left in the figure and heats the glass rod 106. The tail support platform 116 also moves to extend the specified area of the glass rod 106. It is pulled at the tail end. During the melting process (S178), the heating source 122 heats the glass rod 106 with a flame, the concentration of which is less than the concentration of the preheated flame (S170). The position of the heating source 122 is at the same position as the first During the extension process (S176). The tail support 116 is moved to melt the glass rod 106. Fig. 42 shows another method of the tail end drawing process (S158) in the tail end drawing process (S158) of Fig. 37. Setting example. This method controls the amount of gas, the moving distance of the heating source 122, and the moving speed of the tail support table 116 according to the progress time of the tail end of the glass rod 106. The amount of gas, the moving distance of the heating source 122, and the tail The paper size of the support 116 is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 517043

File:5546pii 1 .doc ^ B7File: 5546pii 1 .doc ^ B7

五、發明說明GO (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) 移動速度被設定一次。此設定係依據切口 284之位置、在第 二加熱狀況中沿著軸線方向之玻璃竿106之長度與直徑的變 化與延長速度設定(S157)。玻璃竿第二延長裝置111接著依據 在尾端拉出過程(S158)中玻璃竿106之尾端拉出過程的進行 時間,重新設定氣體數量、加熱源122之移動距離及尾部支 撐台116之移動速度。 舉例來說,在用以尾端拉出之預加熱過程中(S170),其 進行了 300秒,加熱源122之移動距離設定至0mm。尾部支 撐台116之移動速度設定至0mm/分。用以加熱源122之氫氣 (H2)數量設定至250cc/分。從加熱源122之內部噴管輸出之氧 氣(02)(內部)數量設定至30cc/分。從加熱源122之外部噴管輸 出之氧氣(〇2)(外部)數量設定至lOOcc/分。依照上述狀況,加 熱源122加熱玻璃竿106。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 在用以尾端拉出之延長過程中(S172),其進行了 60秒, 用以加熱源122之氫氣(H2)數量設定至250cc/分。從加熱源122 之內部噴管輸出之氧氣(〇2)(內部)數量設定至3〇cc/分。從加熱 源122之外部噴管輸出之氧氣(〇2)(外部)數量設定至lOOcc/ 分。依照上述設定狀況,加熱源122加熱玻璃竿106。加熱源 122之移動距離設定至〇mm,尾部支撐台116以10mm/分之 移動速度延長玻璃竿1〇6。 在第二加熱過程中(S174),其進行了 20秒,尾部支撐台 116之移動速度設定至〇mm/分。加熱源122之移動距離設定 至15mm。用以加熱源122之氫氣(H2)數量設定至130cc/分。 從加熱源122之內部噴管輸出之氧氣(〇2)(內部)數量設定至 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 517043V. Description of the invention GO (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) The movement speed is set once. This setting is based on the position of the cutout 284, and the change and extension speed setting of the length and diameter of the glass rod 106 along the axis direction in the second heating condition (S157). The second extension device 111 of the glass rod then resets the amount of gas, the moving distance of the heating source 122, and the movement of the tail support table 116 according to the progress time of the tail rod drawing process of the glass rod 106 in the tail drawing process (S158). speed. For example, in the pre-heating process (S170) with which the tail end is pulled out, it is performed for 300 seconds, and the moving distance of the heating source 122 is set to 0 mm. The moving speed of the tail support 116 is set to 0 mm / min. The amount of hydrogen (H2) used to heat the source 122 was set to 250 cc / min. The amount of oxygen (02) (internal) output from the internal nozzle of the heating source 122 was set to 30 cc / min. The amount of oxygen (02) (external) output from the external nozzle of the heating source 122 was set to 100 cc / min. In accordance with the above situation, the heating source 122 heats the glass rod 106. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs During the extension process (S172) for the tail end pull-out, it took 60 seconds to set the amount of hydrogen (H2) for heating source 122 to 250cc / min. The amount of oxygen (02) (internal) output from the internal nozzle of the heating source 122 was set to 30 cc / min. The amount of oxygen (02) (external) output from the external nozzle of the heating source 122 was set to 100 cc / min. In accordance with the setting conditions described above, the heating source 122 heats the glass rod 106. The moving distance of the heating source 122 is set to 0 mm, and the tail support base 116 extends the glass rod 106 at a moving speed of 10 mm / min. In the second heating process (S174), it was performed for 20 seconds, and the moving speed of the tail support table 116 was set to 0 mm / min. The moving distance of the heating source 122 is set to 15 mm. The amount of hydrogen (H2) used to heat the source 122 was set to 130 cc / min. The amount of oxygen (〇2) (internal) output from the internal nozzle of the heating source 122 is set to the size of this paper applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 517043

File:5 546pn 1 .doc B7 A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(irf) 15cc/分。從加熱源122之外部噴管輸出之氧氣(〇2)(外部)數量 設定至50cc/分。依照上述設定狀況’加熱源122加熱玻璃竿 106 ° 在用以尾端拉出之第二延長過程中(SH6),其進行了 180 秒,加熱源122之移動距離從15mm增加至25mm。用以加熱 源122之氫氣(H2)數量設定至130cc/分。從加熱源122之內部 噴管輸出之氧氣(〇2)(內部)數量設定至15cc/分。從加熱源122 之外部噴管輸出之氧氣(〇2)(外部)數量設定至5〇cx/分。依照上 述設定狀況,加熱源122加熱玻璃竿106。尾部支撐台116以 10mm/分之移動速度延長玻璃竿106。 最後,在用以尾端拉出之融化過程中(S178),其進行了 30秒,加熱源I22不會從用以尾端拉出之第二延長過程中之 位置移動,因此移動距離維持在25mm。用以加熱源122之氫 氣(H2)數量設定至130cc/分。從加熱源122之內部噴管輸出之 氧氣(〇2)(內部)數量設定至30cc/分。從加熱源122之外部噴管 輸出之氧氣(〇2)(外部)數量設定至20cc/分。依照上述設定狀 況,加熱源1M加熱玻璃竿106。尾部支撐台116以120mm/ 分之移動速度融化玻璃竿106 ◦ 依照第42圖所示之設定狀況,具有直徑爲6〇nnn之玻璃 竿106會經由玻璃竿第二延長裝置U1被尾端拉出。被尾端 拉出之區域之預製件的形狀,形成一圓錐形。此區域之長度 與直徑分別爲61mm與60mm。尾端拉出過程所需之時間爲12 分。 第43圖繪示的是在第37圖之尾端拉出過程(S158)中, 54 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -------------------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 517043File: 5 546pn 1 .doc B7 A7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention Description (irf) 15cc / min. The amount of oxygen (02) (external) output from the external nozzle of the heating source 122 was set to 50 cc / min. According to the above setting condition, the heating source 122 heats the glass rod 106 °. During the second extension process (SH6) for pulling out the tail end, it took 180 seconds, and the moving distance of the heating source 122 was increased from 15mm to 25mm. The amount of hydrogen (H2) used to heat the source 122 was set to 130 cc / min. The amount of oxygen (02) (internal) output from the internal nozzle of the heating source 122 was set to 15 cc / min. The amount of oxygen (02) (external) output from the external nozzle of the heating source 122 was set to 50 cx / min. In accordance with the setting conditions described above, the heating source 122 heats the glass rod 106. The tail support 116 extends the glass rod 106 at a moving speed of 10 mm / min. Finally, during the melting process with the tail end pulled out (S178), it was performed for 30 seconds. The heating source I22 did not move from the position during the second extension process with the tail end pulled out, so the moving distance was maintained at 25mm. The amount of hydrogen gas (H2) used to heat the source 122 was set to 130 cc / min. The amount of oxygen (02) (internal) output from the internal nozzle of the heating source 122 was set to 30 cc / min. The amount of oxygen (02) (external) output from the external nozzle of the heating source 122 was set to 20 cc / min. In accordance with the above setting conditions, the heating source 1M heats the glass rod 106. The tail support 116 melts the glass rod 106 at a moving speed of 120mm / min. ◦ According to the setting situation shown in Figure 42, the glass rod 106 with a diameter of 60nnn will be pulled out by the second end of the glass rod extension U1. . The shape of the preform in the area pulled out by the tail end forms a conical shape. The length and diameter of this area are 61mm and 60mm, respectively. The time required for the tail-end pull-out process is 12 minutes. Figure 43 shows that during the drawing process (S158) at the end of Figure 37, 54 paper sizes are applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -------- ----------- Order --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 517043

File:5546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(>乙) 尾端拉出過程之另一方法的另一設定範例。此方法依據尾部 支撐台II6之移動距離,控制氣體數量、加熱源122之移動 速度,以及尾部支撐台116之移動速度。 玻璃竿第二延長裝置111偵測尾部支撐台116之移動距 離。依據切口 284之位置、在第二加熱狀況中沿著軸線方向 之玻璃竿106之長度與直徑的變化與延長速度設定(S157),加 熱源122之移動距離與尾部支撐台116之移動速度被設定一 次。玻璃竿第二延長裝置111依據在尾端拉出過程(S158)中尾 部支撐台116之移動距離,重新設定氣體數量、加熱源122 之移動距離及尾部支撐台116之移動速度。 有一個事件是,由於尾部支撐台116沒有移動,故無法 量測出尾部支撐台116之移動距離。當玻璃竿106在尾端拉 出過程期間沒有被充分地加熱時,此可能會從尾部支撐台驅 動馬達275之功率不足而發生。當尾部支撐台驅動馬達275 之輸出不夠大時,可偵測輸出軸之扭力之AC伺服電動機,可 被用來驅動尾部支撐台116。可設定一臨限値用以尾部支撐台 驅動馬達275產生之扭力。當扭力超過此臨限値時,玻璃竿 第二延長裝置111可判定此熱度是不足的。接著,玻璃竿第 二延長裝置111可停止尾部支撐台116之驅動一段時間,並 增加供應至加熱源122之氣體數量。第43圖所示之設定狀況 與第42圖所示之設定狀況相同,除了”進行時間”設定改變爲” 尾部支撐台116移動距離”設定以外。第43圖所示之尾端拉出 方法也具有用以尾端拉出之預加熱過程(S170)、用以尾端拉出 之延長過程(Sl72)、第二加熱過程(S174)、用以尾端拉出之第 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) --------------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043File: 5546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (> B) Another setting example of another method of tail end pull-out process. This method controls the amount of gas, the moving speed of the heating source 122, and the moving speed of the tail support platform 116 according to the moving distance of the tail support platform II6. The glass rod second extension device 111 detects the moving distance of the tail support platform 116. According to the position of the cutout 284, the length and diameter change and extension speed setting of the glass rod 106 along the axis direction in the second heating condition (S157), the moving distance of the heating source 122 and the moving speed of the tail support table 116 are set once. The second extension device 111 of the glass rod resets the amount of gas, the movement distance of the heating source 122, and the movement speed of the tail support base 116 according to the movement distance of the tail support base 116 during the tail end drawing-out process (S158). One incident was that the tail support platform 116 could not be measured because the tail support platform 116 did not move. When the glass rod 106 is not sufficiently heated during the tail-end drawing-out process, this may occur due to insufficient power of the drive motor 275 from the tail support table. When the output of the tail support motor 275 is not large enough, an AC servo motor that can detect the torque of the output shaft can be used to drive the tail support 116. A threshold can be set to use the torque generated by the tail support drive motor 275. When the torque exceeds this threshold, the glass rod second extension device 111 may determine that the heat is insufficient. Then, the second extension device 111 of the glass rod can stop the driving of the tail support platform 116 for a period of time, and increase the amount of gas supplied to the heating source 122. The setting condition shown in FIG. 43 is the same as the setting condition shown in FIG. 42 except that the “Performance time” setting is changed to the “Tail support 116 moving distance” setting. The tail-end drawing method shown in FIG. 43 also has a pre-heating process (S170) for tail-end drawing, an extension process (Sl72) for tail-end drawing, a second heating process (S174), and The first paper size drawn at the tail end is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -------------------- Order ---- ----- line (Please read the phonetic on the back? Matters before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 517043

File:5546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(乡>) 二延長過程(S176),以及用以尾端拉出之融化過程(S1.78)。在 每一過程階段中,依據尾部支撐台116之移動距離,設定加 熱源122之氣體數量與移動距離以及尾部支撐台U6之移動 速度。 舉例來說,在用以尾端拉出之預加熱過程中(S170),因 爲尾部支撐台116之移動速度設定在0mm/分,在開始用以尾 端拉出之預加熱過程後量測300秒。換言之,在300秒中尾 部支撐台116之移動距離設定至0mm。用以加熱源122之氫 氣(H2)數量設定至25〇cc/分。從加熱源122之內部噴管輸出之 氧氣(〇2)(內部)數量設定至30cc/分。從加熱源122之外部噴管 輸出之氧氣(〇2)(外部)數量設定至l〇〇cc/分。依照上述狀況, 加熱源122加熱玻璃竿106。當開始用以尾端拉出之預加熱過 程經過300秒後,過程移至下一步驟。 在用以尾端拉出之延長過程中(S172),當移動距離從 〇mm改變成30mm時,用以加熱源122之氫氣(H2)數量設定至 250cc/分。從加熱源122之內部噴管輸出之氧氣(〇2)(內部)數 量設定至30cc/分。從加熱源122之外部噴管輸出之氧氣 (〇2)(外部)數量設定至l〇〇cc/分。依照上述設定狀況,加熱源 122加熱玻璃竿106。加熱源122之移動距離設定至〇mm,尾 部支撐台116以l〇mm/分之移動速度延長玻璃竿106。 在第二加熱過程中(S174),尾部支撐台116之移動速度 設定至0mm/分,使得尾部支撐台116之移動距離維持在 30mm。加熱源122之移動距離設定至15mm。用以加熱源122 之氫氣(H2)數量設定至i3〇cc/分。從加熱源122之內部噴管輸 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公釐) -----------p------—T--------% (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043File: 5546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (Township) Second extension process (S176), and melting process (S1.78) for tail-end drawing. In each process stage, the amount of gas and the moving distance of the heating source 122 and the moving speed of the tail support U6 are set according to the movement distance of the tail support 116. For example, in the pre-heating process for pulling out the tail end (S170), because the moving speed of the tail support platform 116 is set at 0 mm / min, 300 is measured after the pre-heating process for pulling out the tail end begins second. In other words, the moving distance of the tail support table 116 is set to 0 mm in 300 seconds. The amount of hydrogen gas (H2) used to heat the source 122 was set to 25 cc / min. The amount of oxygen (02) (internal) output from the internal nozzle of the heating source 122 was set to 30 cc / min. The amount of oxygen (02) (external) output from the external nozzle of the heating source 122 was set to 100 cc / min. In accordance with the above situation, the heating source 122 heats the glass rod 106. When the preheating process with the tail end pulled out has elapsed 300 seconds, the process moves to the next step. During the extension with the tail end pulled out (S172), when the moving distance is changed from 0 mm to 30 mm, the amount of hydrogen (H2) used to heat the source 122 is set to 250 cc / min. The amount of oxygen (02) (internal) output from the internal nozzle of the heating source 122 was set to 30 cc / min. The amount of oxygen (02) (external) output from the external nozzle of the heating source 122 was set to 100 cc / min. In accordance with the setting conditions described above, the heating source 122 heats the glass rod 106. The moving distance of the heating source 122 is set to 0 mm, and the tail support base 116 extends the glass rod 106 at a moving speed of 10 mm / min. During the second heating process (S174), the movement speed of the tail support base 116 is set to 0 mm / min, so that the movement distance of the tail support base 116 is maintained at 30 mm. The moving distance of the heating source 122 is set to 15 mm. The amount of hydrogen (H2) used to heat the source 122 was set to i30 cc / min. The paper is delivered from the internal nozzle of the heating source 122 to the size of the Chinese national standard (CNS) A4 (21 × 297 mm) ----------- p ------- T- -------% (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 517043

File:5 546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(外) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 出之氧氣(〇2)(內部)數量設定至15cc/分。從加熱源122之外部 噴管輸出之氧氣(〇2)(外部)數量設定至50cc/分。依照上述設定 狀況,加熱源122加熱玻璃竿106。在加熱源122移動15mm 之後,過程移至下一步驟。 接著,在用以尾端拉出之第二延長過程中(S176),當尾 部支撐台116之移動距離從30mm增加至55mm時,加熱源 122之移動距離從15mm增加至25mm。用以加熱源122之氫 氣(H2)數量設定至130CC/分。從加熱源122之內部噴管輸出之 氧氣(〇2)(內部)數量設定至15cc/分。從加熱源122之外部噴管 車目[J出之氧热(〇2)(外部)數量設定至50cc/分。依照上述設定狀 況,加熱源122加熱玻璃竿106。尾部支撐台116以l〇mm/ 分之移動速度延長坡璃竿106。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 最後’在用以尾端拉出之融化過程中(S178),當尾部支 撐台116之移動距離從55mm增加至100mm時,加熱源122 不會從用以尾端拉出之第二延長過程中(S176)之位置移動。因 此移動距離維持在25mm。用以加熱源122之氫氣(H2)數量設 定至13〇cc/分◦從加熱源122之內部噴管輸出之氧氣(02)(內 部)數量設定至30cc/分。從加熱源122之外部噴管輸出之氧氣 (〇2)(外部)數量設定至20cc/分。依照上述設定狀況,加熱源 122加熱玻璃竿1〇6。尾部支撐台116以120mm/分之移動速 度融化玻璃竿106。 (範例1) 依照第43圖所示之設定値,尾端拉出具有直徑爲60mm 之玻璃竿106。一 200W之AC伺服電動機被用做爲尾部支撐 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 517043File: 5 546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (outside) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The amount of oxygen (〇2) (internal) is set to 15cc / min. The amount of oxygen (02) (external) output from the external nozzle of the heating source 122 was set to 50 cc / min. In accordance with the setting conditions described above, the heating source 122 heats the glass rod 106. After the heating source 122 moves 15 mm, the process moves to the next step. Next, in the second extension process for pulling out the tail end (S176), when the moving distance of the tail support base 116 is increased from 30 mm to 55 mm, the moving distance of the heating source 122 is increased from 15 mm to 25 mm. The amount of hydrogen gas (H2) used to heat the source 122 was set to 130CC / min. The amount of oxygen (02) (internal) output from the internal nozzle of the heating source 122 was set to 15 cc / min. The number of external nozzles from the heating source 122, the number of oxygen heat (0) (external) from the car head, was set to 50 cc / min. In accordance with the setting conditions described above, the heating source 122 heats the glass rod 106. The tail support platform 116 extends the slope pole 106 at a moving speed of 10 mm / min. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs in the final melting process (S178), when the moving distance of the tail support 116 increases from 55mm to 100mm, the heating source 122 will not be used from The position is moved during the second extension process (S176) when the tail end is pulled out. Therefore, the moving distance is maintained at 25 mm. The amount of hydrogen (H2) used to heat the source 122 was set to 130 cc / min. The amount of oxygen (02) (internal) output from the internal nozzle of the heat source 122 was set to 30 cc / min. The amount of oxygen (02) (external) output from the external nozzle of the heating source 122 was set to 20 cc / min. In accordance with the setting conditions described above, the heating source 122 heats the glass rod 106. The tail support 116 melts the glass rod 106 at a moving speed of 120 mm / min. (Example 1) According to the setting shown in Fig. 43, a glass rod 106 having a diameter of 60 mm is pulled out at the tail end. A 200W AC servo motor is used as the tail support. The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 517043

File:5 546piii.doc A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(α) 台驅動馬達275。被用做爲尾部支撐台驅動編碼器273之旋轉 編碼器’可偵測尾部支撐台驅動馬達275之旋轉數量。尾部 支撐台驅動馬達2乃之旋轉速度會被尾部支撐台驅動編碼器 273之輸出所控制。可經由量測尾部支撐台驅動編碼器273之 輸出獲尾邰支撐台π 6之移動距離。尾端拉出過程之所需 時間爲15分。被尾端拉出之進行中玻璃竿1〇6之區域的形 狀’形成一圓錐形。此區域之長度與直徑分別爲61 mm與 60mm 〇 (範例2) 依照第43圖所示之設定値,尾端拉出具有直徑爲60mm 之玻璃竿106 ◦被提供在尾部支撐台116上之直線編碼器,可 偵測尾部支撐台116之移動距離。依據直線編碼器偵測到之 尾部支撐台116之移動距離,控制氣體數量、加熱源122之 移動距離與尾部支撐台116之移動速度。被尾端拉出之進行 中玻璃竿106之區域的形狀,形成一圓錐形。此區域之長度 與直徑分別爲65mm與60mm 〇 第44圖繪示的是玻璃竿第二延長裝置πΐ之加熱源122 的架構圖。加熱源122之外管285底端是封閉的。外管285 連接至一易燃氣體通道312。這是一個氫氣通道,其中氫氣是 一適合的易燃氣體之範例。加熱源122具有一易燃氣體流率 控制單元314,被放置在易燃氣體通道312中。所有的內管 286都透過分支工具316連接至一氧氣通道308。氧通道308 是做爲氧氣之通道。惰氣通道296經由連接元件302連接至 氧氣通道308。氧氣流率控制單元310被安裝在介於連接元件 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 訂/--------線%· (請先閱讀背面之注咅?事項再填寫本頁) 517043File: 5 546piii.doc A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of Invention (α) 275 drive motors. It is used as the rotary encoder of the tail support table driving encoder 273, which can detect the number of rotations of the tail support table driving motor 275. The rotation speed of the tail support motor 2 is controlled by the output of the tail support motor encoder 273. By measuring the output of the encoder 273 driven by the tail support, the movement distance of the tail support π 6 can be obtained. The time required for the tail-end pull-out process is 15 minutes. The shape of the region of the ongoing glass rod 106 which is pulled out by the tail end is formed into a conical shape. The length and diameter of this area are 61 mm and 60 mm, respectively. (Example 2) According to the setting shown in Figure 43, the rear end pulls out a glass rod 106 with a diameter of 60 mm. ◦ A straight line provided on the rear support 116 The encoder can detect the moving distance of the tail support 116. Based on the moving distance of the tail support platform 116 detected by the linear encoder, the amount of gas, the movement distance of the heating source 122 and the movement speed of the tail support platform 116 are controlled. The shape of the region of the glass rod 106 being pulled out by the trailing end forms a conical shape. The length and diameter of this area are 65mm and 60mm, respectively. Figure 44 shows the structure of the heating source 122 of the second extension device π 玻璃 of the glass rod. The bottom end of the outer tube 285 of the heating source 122 is closed. The outer tube 285 is connected to a flammable gas passage 312. This is a hydrogen channel where hydrogen is an example of a suitable flammable gas. The heating source 122 has a flammable gas flow rate control unit 314 and is placed in the flammable gas passage 312. All inner tubes 286 are connected to an oxygen channel 308 through a branching tool 316. The oxygen channel 308 is used as a channel for oxygen. The inert gas passage 296 is connected to the oxygen passage 308 via a connection element 302. The oxygen flow rate control unit 310 is installed between the connecting elements. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). Order / -------- line% · (Please read the back first Note? Please fill in this page for matters) 517043

File:5546pii 1 .doc B7 五、發明說明(fp 302與氧氣通道308之入口間。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 惰氣通道296具有一閥門300與一惰氣流率控制單元 298。加熱源122具有一控制元件304,用以依據從氧氣流率 控制單元310輸出之流率資料來控制驅動源306。驅動源306 連接至閥門300。易燃氣體流率控制單元314與氧氣流率控制 單元310控制第42圖與第43圖所示之氫氣H2與氧氣02的流 率。一閥門例如電子閥門或電磁閥門可被用做爲閥門3〇〇。三 方向管或三方向閥門可被用以連接元件302。 第45圖繪示的是加熱源I22之頂部的平面圖。每一內管 286具有1mm之內部直徑與3mm之外部直徑,其被插入在具 有30mm之內部直徑之外管285內。內管286環繞外管285 之中心,被放置在同中心圓之複數列中。 內管286以規則間距被放置在每一列中。相鄰列都朝著 外管285之外部方向,以變成每一列最高內管286之間距密 度。內管286可以均一密度被安裝在外管285內部◦氧氣流 動在氧氣出口 288內部,其是內管286之內部。易燃氣體流 動在易燃氣體出口 290內部,其是外管285之內部。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 加熱源122之移動將解釋如下。氫氣從氫氣供應源(圖中 未繪示出)透過易燃氣體通道312流入外管285中。氧氣經由 分支工具316被分配至內管286中。氧氣從氧氣供應源(圖中 未繪示出)透過氧氣通道308被供應。氫氣與氧氣在外管285 之頂部被混合。經由燃燒此混合氣體可獲得火焰294。 依照玻璃竿1〇6之處理目的,可經由使用氧氣流率控制 單元310與易燃氣體流率控制單元314來調整氫氣量與氧氣 59 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 517043 A7File: 5546pii 1 .doc B7 V. Description of the invention (fp 302 and the entrance of the oxygen channel 308. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The inert gas channel 296 has a valve 300 and an inert gas flow rate control unit 298. The heating source 122 has a control element 304 for controlling the driving source 306 based on the flow rate data output from the oxygen flow rate control unit 310. The driving source 306 is connected to the valve 300. The flammable gas flow rate control unit 314 and oxygen The flow rate control unit 310 controls the flow rates of hydrogen H2 and oxygen 02 shown in Figs. 42 and 43. A valve such as an electronic valve or a solenoid valve can be used as the valve 300. A three-way pipe or a three-way valve Can be used to connect element 302. Figure 45 shows a plan view of the top of heating source I22. Each inner tube 286 has an internal diameter of 1 mm and an external diameter of 3 mm, which are inserted beyond the internal diameter of 30 mm Inside the tube 285. The inner tube 286 surrounds the center of the outer tube 285 and is placed in a plurality of columns of the same center circle. The inner tubes 286 are placed at regular intervals in each column. Adjacent columns are directed outward of the outer tube 285 To become every The highest density between the inner tubes 286. The inner tube 286 can be installed inside the outer tube 285 with a uniform density. Oxygen flows inside the oxygen outlet 288, which is inside the inner tube 286. Flammable gas flows inside the flammable gas outlet 290. It is the inside of the outer tube 285. The movement of the heating source 122 printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs will be explained below. Hydrogen flows from the hydrogen supply source (not shown in the figure) into the outer tube 285 through the flammable gas passage 312 Medium. Oxygen is distributed into the inner pipe 286 via the branch tool 316. Oxygen is supplied from an oxygen supply source (not shown in the figure) through the oxygen channel 308. Hydrogen and oxygen are mixed on the top of the outer pipe 285. This mixture is mixed by burning The gas can obtain flame 294. According to the processing purpose of glass rod 106, the amount of hydrogen and oxygen can be adjusted by using oxygen flow rate control unit 310 and flammable gas flow rate control unit 314. 59 This paper is in accordance with Chinese national standards (CNS ) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) 517043 A7

File:5546pii 1 .doc 五、發明說明(ίΐ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 量,以獲得最佳的火焰狀況。在此同時,信號顯示出從氧氣 流率控制單元310輸出至控制元件304之氧氣的流率。氧氣 之直線速度是一數値,其可經由將內管286之內部區域除以 氧氣之流率引導出。 假如氧氣之直線速度是1.0公尺/秒或以下,控制元件304 驅動驅動源306並開啓閥門300。接著,氮氣是一惰氣,以 〇·5公尺/秒之直線速度流入氧氣通道308中,並與氧氣混合。 當改變氧氣之流率時,假如氧氣之直線速度到達1.1公尺/秒, 控制元件304驅動驅動源306並關閉閥門300。 當減少易燃氣體與氧氣之流率使得火焰變小時,接近內 部火焰之頂部之局溫區從加熱源122之頂部移動。此乃因爲 火焰294擴散造成混合惰氣與氧氣。因此,加熱源122之頂 部之表面溫度被維持在攝氏400度以下,使得加熱源122之 氧化作用可被防止。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 當需要加強加熱功率時,因爲燃燒溫度下降,假如惰氣 被混合,則用以流入惰氣之閥門300會被關閉。在此同時, 因爲火焰294很大而欠缺增加易燃氣體與氧氣之流率,火焰 294之高溫區不再位於加熱源122之頂部。因此,加熱源122 之頂部之表面溫度被維持在攝氏400度以下。經由設定在開 啓與關閉閥門300時氧氣之不同的直線速度値,可防止經由 開啓與關閉閥門300所造成的跳動產生。這需設定開啓至 l_〇m/秒或以下,以及設定關閉至1.1 m/秒或以上。 想要的是,經由閥門300之開啓,惰氣具有一介於〇.5m/ 秒至2m/秒間之直線速度之流入量。惰氣之直線速度可經由將 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 517043File: 5546pii 1 .doc V. Description of Invention (ίΐ) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) to get the best flame condition. At the same time, the signal indicates the flow rate of oxygen output from the oxygen flow rate control unit 310 to the control element 304. The linear velocity of oxygen is a few milliseconds, which can be guided by dividing the internal area of the inner tube 286 by the flow rate of oxygen. If the linear velocity of oxygen is 1.0 m / s or less, the control element 304 drives the driving source 306 and opens the valve 300. Next, nitrogen is an inert gas, and flows into the oxygen channel 308 at a linear velocity of 0.5 m / s, and is mixed with oxygen. When the flow rate of oxygen is changed, if the linear velocity of oxygen reaches 1.1 meters / second, the control element 304 drives the driving source 306 and closes the valve 300. When the flow rate of flammable gas and oxygen is reduced so that the flame becomes smaller, the local temperature region near the top of the internal flame moves from the top of the heating source 122. This is because the flame 294 diffuses and causes a mixture of inert gas and oxygen. Therefore, the surface temperature of the top portion of the heating source 122 is maintained below 400 ° C, so that the oxidation of the heating source 122 can be prevented. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. When the heating power needs to be increased, because the combustion temperature drops, if the inert gas is mixed, the valve 300 for inflow of inert gas will be closed. At the same time, because the flame 294 is large and lacks an increase in the flow rate of flammable gases and oxygen, the high temperature region of the flame 294 is no longer located on top of the heating source 122. Therefore, the surface temperature of the top of the heating source 122 is maintained below 400 degrees Celsius. By setting the different linear speeds of oxygen when the valve 300 is opened and closed, it is possible to prevent the bounce caused by opening and closing the valve 300. This needs to be set to l_〇m / sec or less, and set to 1.1 m / sec or more. It is desirable that, with the opening of the valve 300, the inert gas has an inflow volume with a linear velocity between 0.5 m / s and 2 m / s. The linear speed of the inert gas can be adjusted by applying the paper size to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 517043

File:5546piil.doc A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(π) 內管286之氧氣出口 288的內部區域除以惰氣之流率旨十舞; 出◦假如惰氣之直線速度爲〇.5m/秒或以下,則難以控制加勢 源122之頂部的溫度。另一^方面’假如惰氣之直線速度爲2.0m/ 秒或以上,由於氫氣燃燒不完全,故火焰之溫度減低。 假如使用一加熱源122以火焰294來加熱玻璃竿1〇6, 金屬氧化物通常將不會產生在加熱源122之頂部上。此乃因 爲加熱源122之頂部之表面溫度被維持在攝氏400度或以 下,因此,金屬氧化物不會被附加至玻璃竿106上,以及可 製造出高品質的玻璃竿106。 具有一平均直徑爲65mm之玻璃竿106會經由玻璃竿第 二延長裝置Π1所延長,其中玻璃竿第二延長裝置111具有 控制惰氣流速之加熱源122。具有外界物質例如金屬氧化物之 玻璃竿106的數量對處理的玻璃竿106的整體數量的比例爲 0.2%。比較來說,當玻璃竿106總是經由關閉閥門300被延 長時,具有外界物質例如金屬氧化物之玻璃竿106的數量對 處理的玻璃竿106的整體數量的比例變成一高數値。 第46圖繪示的是介於氧氣之直線速度與加熱源I22之頂 部溫度間的關係圖。此所繪示的事件是,總是混合氧氣與具 有直線速度爲〇.5m/秒之氮氣,以及不混合氧氣與氮氣。當混 合氮氣時,加熱源122之頂部溫度不超過攝氏400度。當不 混合氮氣時,在此區域中的溫度到達攝氏4〇〇度至攝氏700 度,其中氧氣之直線速度爲lm/秒或以下。因此,當氧氣之直 線速度爲Ini/秒或以上時,加熱源122之表面溫度可經由混合 氧氣與氮氣來控制。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) --------------------訂--------- Γ1Γ先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) A7 517043File: 5546piil.doc A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention (π) The internal area of the oxygen outlet 288 of the inner tube 286 is divided by the flow rate of the inert gas. If the linear velocity is 0.5 m / s or less, it is difficult to control the temperature of the top of the potential application source 122. On the other hand, if the linear velocity of the inert gas is 2.0 m / s or more, the temperature of the flame is reduced due to incomplete combustion of hydrogen. If a heating source 122 is used to heat the glass rod 106 with flame 294, metal oxides will generally not be generated on top of the heating source 122. This is because the surface temperature on the top of the heating source 122 is maintained at 400 degrees Celsius or lower, so that metal oxides are not added to the glass rod 106, and a high-quality glass rod 106 can be manufactured. A glass rod 106 having an average diameter of 65 mm is extended by the second extension device Π1 of the glass rod, wherein the second extension device 111 of the glass rod has a heating source 122 for controlling the flow rate of the inert gas. The ratio of the number of the glass rods 106 having an external substance such as a metal oxide to the entire number of the processed glass rods 106 was 0.2%. In comparison, when the glass rod 106 is always extended via the shut-off valve 300, the ratio of the number of glass rods 106 having foreign substances such as metal oxides to the total number of processed glass rods 106 becomes a high number. Fig. 46 is a graph showing the relationship between the linear velocity of oxygen and the top temperature of the heating source I22. The events shown here are always mixing oxygen and nitrogen with a linear velocity of 0.5 m / s, and not mixing oxygen and nitrogen. When nitrogen is mixed, the top temperature of the heating source 122 does not exceed 400 degrees Celsius. When nitrogen is not mixed, the temperature in this region reaches 400 ° C to 700 ° C, where the linear velocity of oxygen is lm / sec or less. Therefore, when the linear velocity of oxygen is Ini / second or more, the surface temperature of the heating source 122 can be controlled by mixing oxygen and nitrogen. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -------------------- Order --------- Γ1Γ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) A7 517043

File:5546pii 1 .doc ___ B7 _ 五、發明說明(j^) 第47圖繪示的是預製件107之尖端的形狀圖,其直徑在 尾端拉出過程(SI%)中被縮減及融化。D代表預製件107之直 徑。〇代表預製件107之直徑開始被縮減的位置。p代表預製 件107之直徑D被縮減至1%或在最初直徑以下之位置。預製 件107具有一逐漸變細的形狀,其兩端可以方程式i/3dsl $ 3D表示。在此,L代表介於位置〇與位置p間之長度。 到達穩定狀態之拉出時間爲從預製件拉出裝置500上設 定預製件107直到光纖之直徑與拉出速度到達規定値爲止之 時間◦當預製件107被拉出至一光纖時,預製件1〇7之最初 形狀影響拉出至到達穩定狀態之花費時間。這種影響變的較 大,如同預製件107之直徑變的較大。然後,拉出至到達穩 定狀態之花費時間變的較長。 具有方程式1/3D^L$3D之形狀之預製件107,可縮減 拉出至到達穩定狀態的花費時間。假如L<1/3D,因爲預製件 1〇7之尖端的滴落時間變的較長,故光纖之直徑與拉出速度到 達規定値的花費時間增加。假如L>1/3D,則預製件107之尖 端的滴落時間可被減少,但是預製件107之逐漸變細的形狀 變成拉出之穩定狀態的形狀的花費時間變長。接著,光纖之 直徑與拉出速度到達規定値的花費時間變的較長。因此,較 佳是使預製件107之逐漸變細的形狀如同l=D。 在經由火焰加熱部分預製件107以融化預製件107的事 件中,剩餘變形保持在預製件107之逐漸變細部分的兩端。 假如在此逐漸變細部分之剩餘變形很大,當一強力撞擊力被 供應在預製件107上時,可在預製件1〇7之兩端上產生裂解。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ---------1T---------線表 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043File: 5546pii 1 .doc ___ B7 _ 5. Description of the invention (j ^) Figure 47 shows the shape of the tip of the preform 107, and its diameter is reduced and melted during the tail end pull-out process (SI%). . D represents the diameter of the preform 107. 〇 represents the position where the diameter of the preform 107 starts to be reduced. p represents a position where the diameter D of the preform 107 is reduced to 1% or below the original diameter. The preform 107 has a tapered shape, and its two ends can be represented by the equation i / 3dsl $ 3D. Here, L represents a length between the position 0 and the position p. The pull-out time to reach the stable state is the time from setting the preform 107 on the preform pull-out device 500 until the diameter of the optical fiber and the pull-out speed reach the prescribed value. The initial shape of 〇7 affects the time it takes to reach the steady state. This effect becomes larger, as the diameter of the preform 107 becomes larger. Then, it takes longer to pull out to reach a stable state. The preform 107 having the shape of the equation 1 / 3D ^ L $ 3D can reduce the time taken for drawing to reach a stable state. If L < 1 / 3D, as the drip time of the tip of the preform 107 becomes longer, the time taken for the diameter of the optical fiber and the pull-out speed to reach the specified value increases. If L > 1 / 3D, the dripping time of the tip end of the preform 107 can be reduced, but it takes a long time for the tapered shape of the preform 107 to become a drawn-out stable shape. Then, it takes longer for the diameter of the optical fiber and the drawing speed to reach a predetermined threshold. Therefore, it is preferable to make the tapered shape of the preform 107 like l = D. In the case where a part of the preform 107 is heated by flame to melt the preform 107, the remaining deformation is maintained at both ends of the tapered portion of the preform 107. If the remaining deformation of the tapered portion is large here, when a strong impact force is supplied to the preform 107, cracks may be generated on both ends of the preform 107. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) --------- 1T -------- -Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 517043

File:5546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 五、發明說明(如) 經由鎔接預製件107與虛擬竿產生之一熱撞擊,也可在預製 件107之兩端上產生裂解。預製件107兩端上之變形量理想 是40kgf/cm2或以下。經由控制預製件1〇7之剩餘變形量保持 在40kgf/cm2或以下,可防止預製件1〇7上產生裂解。 (範例) 具有直徑爲30mm之預製件107被拉出。長度L設定至 30mm。保持預製件107之逐漸變形部分的變形量在 40kgf/cm2 ’藉以在預製件107與虛擬竿之鎔接期間不會產生 裂解。當光纖之設定直徑是125 // m以及拉出速度是100mm/ 分時’拉出至到達穩定狀態之花費時間是20分整。從預製件 拉出裝置500上預製件1〇7之設定至預製件107之尖端滴落 的時間爲10分。光纖之直徑與拉出速度到達規定値的花費時 間爲10分。 (比較的範例1) 具有直徑爲30mm之預製件107被拉出。長度L設定至 5mm。保持預製件1〇7之逐漸變形部分的變形量在 4〇kgf/cm2,藉以在預製件1〇7與虛擬竿之鎔接期間不會產生 裂解。當光纖之設定直徑是125 // m以及拉出速度是100mm/ 分時,拉出至到達穩定狀態之花費時間是50分整。從預製件 拉出裝置500上預製件107之設定至預製件107之尖端滴落 的時間爲20分。光纖之直徑與拉出速度到達規定値的花費時 間爲30分。 (比較的範例2) 具有直徑爲3〇mm之預製件107被拉出。長度L設定至 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ------------------^ -訂_"--------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043File: 5546pii 1 .doc A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (eg) A thermal impact between the prefabricated part 107 and the virtual rod can also cause cracks on both ends of the prefabricated part 107. The amount of deformation at both ends of the preform 107 is preferably 40 kgf / cm2 or less. By controlling the remaining amount of deformation of the preform 107 to 40 kgf / cm2 or less, it is possible to prevent cracking on the preform 107. (Example) A preform 107 having a diameter of 30 mm is pulled out. The length L is set to 30 mm. The deformation amount of the gradually deformed part of the preform 107 is maintained at 40 kgf / cm2 'so that no cracking occurs during the connection between the preform 107 and the virtual rod. When the set diameter of the fiber is 125 // m and the pull-out speed is 100 mm / min, the time it takes to pull out to reach a stable state is 20 minutes. The time from the setting of the preform 107 on the preform pull-out device 500 to the tip of the preform 107 dripping was 10 minutes. It takes 10 minutes for the diameter of the optical fiber and the pull-out speed to reach a predetermined threshold. (Comparative Example 1) A preform 107 having a diameter of 30 mm was pulled out. The length L is set to 5 mm. Keep the deformation amount of the gradually deformed part of the preform 107 at 40kgf / cm2, so that no cracking will occur during the connection of the preform 107 with the virtual rod. When the set diameter of the optical fiber is 125 // m and the pull-out speed is 100 mm / min, the time it takes to pull out to reach a stable state is 50 minutes. The time from the setting of the preform 107 on the preform pull-out device 500 to the dripping of the tip of the preform 107 is 20 minutes. It takes 30 minutes for the diameter of the optical fiber and the pull-out speed to reach a predetermined threshold. (Comparative Example 2) A preform 107 having a diameter of 30 mm was pulled out. The length L is set to the size of this paper. It is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------------ ^ -Order_ " --- ----- line (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Employee Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

File:5546pii 1 .doc 幻 B7 五、發明說明(合() 100mm。保持預製件107之逐漸變形部分的變形量在 40kgf/cm2,藉以在預製件107與虛擬竿之鎔接期間不會產生 裂解。當光纖之設定直徑是125//m以及拉出速度是100mm/ 分時,拉出至到達穩定狀態之花費時間是40分整。從預製件 拉出裝置500上預製件107之設定至預製件107之尖端滴落 的時間爲10分。光纖之直徑與拉出速度到達規定値的花費時 間爲3 0分。 (比較的範例3) 具有直徑爲30mm之預製件107被拉出。長度L設定至 30mm。保持預製件107之逐漸變形部分的變形量在 60kgf/cm2。因爲在預製件107與虛擬竿之鎔接期間會產生裂 解,故無法拉出預製件107。 如上所述,經由使預製件107之尖端形狀爲1/3D$L$ 3D,可縮減拉出預製件107至一光纖的時間。 第48圖繪示的是預製件107之尖端的另一形狀圖,其尾 端被延長。如第48圖所示之預製件107在其一端經由火焰形 成一融化部分332,以及在其另一端上有一經機械切割之切割 面334。如第48(a)圖所示之融化部分332被火焰快速地融化。 如第48(b)圖所示之融化部分332被漸漸地融化,經由縮減直 徑以形成一逐漸變細部分336。一薄部分338被提供在融化部 分332之尖端上如如第48(c)圖所示。 當拉出具有逐漸變細部分336之預製件107如第48(b) 圖所示時,因爲融化部分332之直徑小,故用以預製件107 之尖端之滴落花費時間短,以及預製件1〇7之數量被滴落的 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) — — — — —--訂--I------ 517043File: 5546pii 1 .doc Magic B7 5. Description of the invention (100mm). Keep the deformation of the gradually deformed part of the preform 107 at 40kgf / cm2, so that no cracking will occur during the connection between the preform 107 and the virtual rod. When the set diameter of the optical fiber is 125 // m and the pull-out speed is 100mm / min, the time it takes to pull out to reach a stable state is 40 minutes. From the setting of the preform 107 on the preform pull-out device 500 to the prefabrication The drop time of the tip of the piece 107 is 10 minutes. It takes 30 minutes for the diameter of the optical fiber and the pull-out speed to reach the specified frame. (Comparative Example 3) A preform 107 having a diameter of 30 mm is pulled out. Length L Set it to 30mm. Keep the amount of deformation of the gradually deformed part of the preform 107 at 60kgf / cm2. Since cracks occur during the connection between the preform 107 and the virtual rod, the preform 107 cannot be pulled out. As described above, by making The shape of the tip of the preform 107 is 1 / 3D $ L $ 3D, which can reduce the time required to pull out the preform 107 to an optical fiber. Figure 48 shows another shape of the tip of the preform 107, and the tail end is Extended. Preform 107 shown in Figure 48 A flame forms a melting portion 332 at one end, and a mechanically cut cutting surface 334 is formed at the other end thereof. The melting portion 332 shown in Fig. 48 (a) is rapidly melted by the flame. As shown in Fig. 48 (b) The melting portion 332 shown is gradually melted, and the diameter is reduced to form a tapered portion 336. A thin portion 338 is provided on the tip of the melting portion 332 as shown in Fig. 48 (c). When pulled out When the preform 107 having the tapered portion 336 is shown in FIG. 48 (b), because the diameter of the melting portion 332 is small, it takes a short time to drip the tip of the preform 107, and the preform 107 The quantity of the paper being dropped is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (please read the precautions on the reverse side before filling out this page) — — — — ——— Order--I- ----- 517043

File: 5546piil.doc A7 B7 五 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 發明說明(k) 也小◦當拉出具有逐漸變細部分336與薄部分338之預製件 107如弟48(c)圖所不時’用以預製件1〇7之尖端之滴落花費 時間可被縮減至預製件107之傳統形狀所需之1/3或更少時 間。經由預製件107之滴下物造成材質之損失,可被限制在 小量薄部分33 8。 想要的是,薄部分338之形狀佔了融化部分332之重量 的0·1%至15%。假如薄部分338之重量小於融化部分332之 重量的0.1%,則經由提供薄部分338產生之效果無法被獲得。 另一方面,假如薄部分338之重量大於融化部分332之重量 的15%,則用以預製件1〇7之尖端之滴落花費時間變長,以 及在拉出期間預製件107之損失增加。 想要的是,薄部分338之直徑介於預製件1〇7之主體直 徑的1/2至1/10。假如薄部分338之直徑在此範圍內,則在早 期拉出階段預製件107之尖端的滴落所需時間可被縮短。假 如薄部分338之長度大約此直徑之1至5倍,則預製件之損 失可被限制在一小量。 第49圖繪示的是在第26圖之表面處理過程(S168)中之 預製件107被表面處理前,預製件1〇7的損害圖。經由玻璃 竿第二延長裝置111延長之預製件107,會經由氫氟酸蝕刻做 爲一表面處理。此化學性切割預製件107之金屬包被 (cladding),使得預製件1〇7具有金屬包被之規定比例之中心 部分厚度。 氫氟酸蝕刻處理是分解介於玻璃之矽與氧間之束縛力的 處理。氫氟酸蝕刻處理以大約每小時8mm之速度,化學性切 本紙張尺度適用中關家標準(CNS)A4規格咖⑽公董) -------------------^--------- (請先閱讀背面之注音?事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043File: 5546piil.doc A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Property Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (5) The invention description (k) is also small. From time to time, the dripping time of the tip of the preform 107 can be reduced to 1/3 or less of the time required for the traditional shape of the preform 107. The material loss caused by the dripping material through the preform 107 can be limited to a small amount of thin part 33 8. It is desirable that the shape of the thin portion 338 accounts for 0.1 to 15% of the weight of the melting portion 332. If the weight of the thin portion 338 is less than 0.1% of the weight of the melting portion 332, the effect produced by providing the thin portion 338 cannot be obtained. On the other hand, if the weight of the thin portion 338 is greater than 15% of the weight of the melting portion 332, the dripping of the tip of the preform 107 takes longer, and the loss of the preform 107 increases during the pull-out. It is desirable that the diameter of the thin portion 338 be between 1/2 and 1/10 of the diameter of the main body of the preform 107. If the diameter of the thin portion 338 is within this range, the time required for dripping of the tip of the preform 107 in the early drawing-out stage can be shortened. If the length of the thin portion 338 is about 1 to 5 times this diameter, the loss of the preform can be limited to a small amount. Fig. 49 shows a damage map of the preform 107 before the surface treatment of the preform 107 in the surface treatment process (S168) of Fig. 26. The preform 107 extended by the second extension device 111 of the glass rod is etched by hydrofluoric acid as a surface treatment. The chemical cutting of the preform 107 is cladding so that the preform 107 has the thickness of the central portion of the metal coating in a prescribed proportion. Hydrofluoric acid etching is a process that breaks down the binding force between silicon and oxygen in glass. Hydrofluoric acid etching treatment is performed at a speed of about 8mm per hour. The size of the paper is chemically cut. The paper size applies to CNS A4 specifications. ---------------- --- ^ --------- (Please read the phonetic on the back? Matters before filling out this page) Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 517043

File:5 546pii 1 -doc B7 五、發明說明) 割預製件107之表面。然而,假如在預製件107之表面上有 裂縫或凹面’則具有裂縫或凹面之地點會被額外切割,而形 成一比預製件107之另一部份上之凹面之更大的凹面。經由 氫氟酸蝕刻之處理造成的凹面稱爲一氟化氫凹面。在預製件 107之拉出成光纖期間,此氟化氫凹面是造成光纖分裂的原 因。 在氫氟酸蝕刻之處理前進行硏磨過程,以移走預製件107 上之裂縫與凹面,可獲得在其表面上不含氟化氫凹面之預製 件107。此方法是,以上述預製件107之變形點的溫度來火焰 硏磨預製件1〇7。在火焰硏磨期間,預製件107被火焰硏磨, 使其不均勻表面將在〇.3mm範圍內。在以氫氟酸蝕刻預製件 1〇7前火焰硏磨預製件107,可防止氟化氫凹面的產生。這是 可能的,此乃因爲在預製件107中之變形量可被減小,以及 不具裂縫之一平滑表面可被獲得。不僅是火焰硏磨適合,而 且機械硏磨可被用來硏磨預製件107。 第51圖繪示的是經由視覺檢查計數範例與比較的範例 之預製件107上產生之氟化氫凹面的數量。第52圖繪示的是 在範例與比較的範例之氫氟酸蝕刻的處理之後,預製件1〇7 之不均勻表面。首先,預製件107a與另一預製件l〇7b被放置 在支撐台上,其中預製件107b具有與預製件l〇7a之相同形 狀。 接著,預製件107a之一端被舉起至i〇cm之高度,而其 另一端維持在支撐台上。然後,一端被舉起之預製件1〇%降 下至預製件107b上,使得預製件107a具有一裂縫。每一複數 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) -----------——訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043File: 5 546pii 1 -doc B7 V. Description of the invention) Cut the surface of the preform 107. However, if there is a crack or concave surface on the surface of the preform 107 ', the place with the crack or concave surface will be additionally cut to form a larger concave surface than the concave surface on the other part of the preform 107. The concave surface caused by the hydrofluoric acid etching process is called a hydrogen fluoride concave surface. During the drawing of the preform 107 into an optical fiber, this hydrogen fluoride concave surface is the cause of the fiber splitting. The honing process is performed before the treatment of hydrofluoric acid etching to remove the cracks and concave surfaces on the preform 107, and a preform 107 having no concave surface of hydrogen fluoride on its surface can be obtained. In this method, the preform 107 is flame-honed at the temperature of the deformation point of the preform 107 described above. During flame honing, the preform 107 is flame honed so that its uneven surface will be in the range of 0.3 mm. The flame honing of the preform 107 before etching the preform 107 with hydrofluoric acid can prevent the generation of a concave surface of hydrogen fluoride. This is possible because the amount of deformation in the preform 107 can be reduced and a smooth surface without cracks can be obtained. Not only is flame honing suitable, but mechanical honing can also be used to hoist the preform 107. Fig. 51 shows the number of hydrogen fluoride concaves produced on the preform 107 of the counting example and the comparative example by visual inspection. Fig. 52 shows the uneven surface of the preform 107 after the hydrofluoric acid etching treatment of the example and the comparative example. First, the preform 107a and another preform 107b are placed on a supporting table, wherein the preform 107b has the same shape as the preform 107a. Next, one end of the preform 107a is lifted to a height of 10 cm, while the other end is maintained on a supporting table. Then, 10% of the preform lifted at one end is lowered onto the preform 107b, so that the preform 107a has a crack. Each multiple paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) --------------- Order --------- line (Please read first Note on the back, please fill out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 517043

File:5 5 46piil.doc B7 五、發明說明(ty) 個預製件107a經由上述之相同方法,以20cm間距被損害在3 個地方。在第51圖與第52圖所示之預處理過程2中,預製 件107a被舉起至20cm之高度,預製件l〇7a之另一損害程序 與預處理過程1相同。 在第51圖與第52圖所示之範例中,每一預製件107a經 由預處理過程1與預處理過程2被處理。接著,每一預製件 107a以噴燒器火焰硏磨,其中噴燒器被提供250ml/分之氫氣 與l45ml/分之氧氣。每一火焰硏磨的預製件l〇7a在室溫中經 由氫氟酸蝕刻之處理。從預製件107之外部直徑蝕刻之材質 厚度爲〇.2mm、1.2mm、2.2mm與3.2mm四步驟之一。每一 四步驟之蝕刻厚度經由氫氟酸蝕刻爲10段預製件107a。 第5〇圖繪示的是預製件107a的示意圖,其係經由氫氟 酸餓刻第51圖與第52圖所示範例之處理。經由量測介於標 記點X與標記點◦之直徑間的直徑差,可獲得預製件107a之 不均勻表面。標記點X係爲經由接觸預製件l〇7b被損害的地 點。標記點〇係距離標記點Xl〇mm之地點,其不會經由接觸 預製件l〇7b而被損害。3個標記點X之直徑的平均値被用做 爲每一預製件107a之直徑。 在第51圖與第52圖所示之比較的範例中,每一預製件 107經由預處理過程1處理,以及經由預處理過程2在不具火 焰硏磨之氫氟酸蝕刻處理。經由視覺檢查評估氟化氫凹面的 數量,以及以範例之相同方法量測不均勻表面。如第52圖與 第53圖所示,預處理過程2之不均勻表面大於預處理過程1 之不均勻表面。此乃因爲在損害過程中,預處理過程2被舉 本紙張尺度適用中國國豕標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) -------------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043File: 5 5 46piil.doc B7 5. Description of the invention (ty) The prefabricated parts 107a were damaged in 3 places at a distance of 20 cm by the same method as described above. In the pretreatment process 2 shown in Figs. 51 and 52, the preform 107a is lifted to a height of 20 cm, and another damage procedure of the preform 107a is the same as that of the pretreatment process 1. In the examples shown in Figs. 51 and 52, each preform 107a is processed through a pretreatment process 1 and a pretreatment process 2. Next, each of the preforms 107a was honed with a burner flame, wherein the burner was supplied with 250 ml / min of hydrogen and 145 ml / min of oxygen. Each flame-honed preform 107a was treated with hydrofluoric acid etching at room temperature. The thickness of the material etched from the outer diameter of the preform 107 is one of four steps of 0.2 mm, 1.2 mm, 2.2 mm, and 3.2 mm. Each four-step etching thickness is etched into 10 preforms 107a by hydrofluoric acid. Fig. 50 shows a schematic view of the preform 107a, which is processed through the examples shown in Figs. 51 and 52 by hydrofluoric acid starvation. By measuring the diameter difference between the diameters of the marking point X and the marking point, an uneven surface of the preform 107a can be obtained. The marked point X is a point where the preform 107b was damaged through contact. The marking point 0 is a point away from the marking point X10 mm, which is not damaged by contacting the preform 107b. The average diameter of the diameters of the three marked points X is used as the diameter of each preform 107a. In the comparative example shown in Fig. 51 and Fig. 52, each of the preforms 107 is processed through the pretreatment process 1 and the pretreatment process 2 is etched with a hydrofluoric acid without flame honing. The number of concave surfaces of hydrogen fluoride was evaluated by visual inspection, and the uneven surface was measured by the same method as the example. As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the uneven surface of the pretreatment process 2 is larger than the uneven surface of the pretreatment process 1. This is because during the damage process, the pretreatment process 2 is used. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) ---------------- --- Order --------- line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 517043

Fne:5 546pmd〇C A7 B7 五、發明說明(β )Fne: 5 546pmd〇C A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (β)

起的比預處理過程1還高。並且,經由預處理過程2之氫氟 酸蝕刻產生之氟化氫凹面的數量大於預處理過程1之氟化氫 凹面的數量。 I 蝕刻量愈大,預製件107之不均勻表面愈大。並且,飽 刻量愈大,經由氫氟酸蝕刻產生之氟化氫凹面的數量愈大。 被火焰硏磨之範例中預製件l〇7a的不均勻表面’低於不被火 焰硏磨之比較的範例中預製件l〇7a的不均勻表面。 在範例上產生之氟化氫凹面的數量小於在比較的範例上 產生之氟化氫凹面的數量,如第51圖所示。因此’在以氫氟 酸蝕刻預製件l〇7a之前,經由火焰硏磨預製件l〇7a ’可減少 在預製件l〇7a中之氟化氫凹面的數量及預製件1〇7之不均勻 表面。 第53圖繪示的是經表面處理之預製件107的另一形狀。 預製件107具有一把手340。把手340係由矽石玻璃所構成, 其經由鎔接或機械處理,被安裝在如第48(c)圖所示之經表面 處理之預製件107的切割面334上。當拉出預製件107成一 光纖時,具有把手340之預製件107可被即刻地安裝在預製 件拉出裝置5〇〇上。被安裝在切割面334上之把手340的直 徑,可小於預製件107的直徑,如第53(b)圖所示。 第54圖繪示的是用以淸洗加熱源之超音波淸洗裝置404 的示意圖。超音波淸洗裝置4〇4包括一超音波震盪器396。一 淸洗液398被盛裝於超音波淸洗裝置404之內部。淸洗液398 包含有10%的氫氟酸與3%的硝酸。氫氟酸用以溶解加熱源122 之外管285與內管286之表面上產生的金屬氧化物。假如外 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ---------訂---------線爲 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043This is higher than the pretreatment process 1. In addition, the number of hydrogen fluoride concaves generated by the hydrofluoric acid etching through the pretreatment process 2 is larger than the number of hydrogen fluoride concaves in the pretreatment process 1. I The larger the amount of etching, the larger the uneven surface of the preform 107. Also, the larger the saturation amount, the larger the number of hydrogen fluoride concave surfaces generated by the hydrofluoric acid etching. The uneven surface of the preform 107a in the flame-honed example is lower than the uneven surface of the preform 107a in the comparative example that is not flame-honed. The number of hydrogen fluoride concaves generated in the example is smaller than the number of hydrogen fluoride concaves generated in the comparative example, as shown in FIG. Therefore, 'the flame honing of the preform 107a before the preform 107a is etched with hydrofluoric acid can reduce the number of hydrogen fluoride concave surfaces in the preform 107a and the uneven surface of the preform 107. FIG. 53 illustrates another shape of the surface-treated preform 107. The preform 107 has a handle 340. The handle 340 is made of silica glass, and is mounted on the cut surface 334 of the surface-treated preform 107 as shown in FIG. 48 (c) through welding or mechanical processing. When the preform 107 is pulled out into an optical fiber, the preform 107 having the handle 340 can be immediately mounted on the preform pulling device 500. The diameter of the handle 340 mounted on the cutting surface 334 may be smaller than the diameter of the preform 107, as shown in Fig. 53 (b). FIG. 54 is a schematic diagram of an ultrasonic washing device 404 for washing a heating source. The ultrasonic washing device 404 includes an ultrasonic oscillator 396. A cleaning solution 398 is contained inside the ultrasonic cleaning device 404. Rinse solution 398 contains 10% hydrofluoric acid and 3% nitric acid. Hydrofluoric acid is used to dissolve metal oxides generated on the surfaces of the outer tube 285 and the inner tube 286 of the heating source 122. If the paper size of this paper applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) --------- Order ------ --- Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 517043

File:5546piild〇c 幻 B7 五、發明說明(“) 管285與內管286係由不銹鋼所構成,則外管285與內管286 之表面上的氧化作用不會輕易地發生。此乃因爲鐵、鉻與鎳 被包含在不銹鋼中’而在不銹鋼之表面上形成一不起化學作 用的薄膜,以防止硝酸之影響’因此可保護其表面。 淸洗液398可包含有一可溶性有機溶劑。可溶性有機溶 劑的範例爲酒精(alcohol)、乙晴(acetonitrile)與四水氫夫喃 (tetrahydrofuran)。加熱源122具有複數個內管286,其具有 1mm之內部直徑與3mm之外部直徑。內管286位在外管285 內部,外管285具有30mm之內部直徑。氫氣流入外管285 內,以及氧氣流入內管286內。外管285連接至一氫氣入口 管392,以及所有的內管286都連接至一氧氣入口管394。 當玻璃竿106經由加熱源122之火焰加熱時,加熱源122 之頂部的溫度會增加至介於攝氏400度至攝氏700度間之高 溫。因此,將會在加熱源122之頂部表面上產生金屬氧化物。 假如加熱源被使用一段長時間,金屬氧化物會漸漸地移去而 變成自由飄移的塵粒。 金屬氧化物之塵粒或外界因素污染例如附加在加熱源 122之玻璃塵粒,可在玻璃竿106之加熱處理期間被移去。這 些塵粒可附加在玻璃竿106之表面,故玻璃竿106之表面層 需被硏磨。假如玻璃竿106被硏磨,則玻璃竿106之包被與 中心部分之直徑的比例將會改變◦結果從玻璃竿106製造出 之光纖的光傳輸特性將會變壞。因此,經由淸洗加熱源122, 可從加熱源122去除外界因素污染與附加至加熱源122之金 屬氧化物。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ---------訂---------線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043File: 5546piild〇c Magic B7 5. Description of the invention (") The tube 285 and the inner tube 286 are made of stainless steel, so the oxidation on the surface of the outer tube 285 and the inner tube 286 will not easily occur. This is because of iron Chromium and nickel are contained in the stainless steel 'and a non-chemical film is formed on the surface of the stainless steel to prevent the influence of nitric acid' so it can protect its surface. 淸 Washing liquid 398 may contain a soluble organic solvent. Soluble organic Examples of solvents are alcohol, acetonitrile, and tetrahydrofuran. The heating source 122 has a plurality of inner tubes 286, which have an inner diameter of 1 mm and an outer diameter of 3 mm. The inner tube is 286 Inside the outer tube 285, the outer tube 285 has an internal diameter of 30 mm. Hydrogen flows into the outer tube 285 and oxygen flows into the inner tube 286. The outer tube 285 is connected to a hydrogen inlet tube 392, and all the inner tubes 286 are connected to one Oxygen inlet tube 394. When the glass rod 106 is heated by the flame of the heating source 122, the temperature at the top of the heating source 122 increases to a high temperature between 400 ° C and 700 ° C. Therefore, Metal oxides will be generated on the top surface of the heating source 122. If the heating source is used for a long time, the metal oxides will gradually be removed and become free-flowing dust particles. The metal oxide dust particles or external factors are polluted For example, the glass dust particles attached to the heating source 122 can be removed during the heat treatment of the glass rod 106. These dust particles can be attached to the surface of the glass rod 106, so the surface layer of the glass rod 106 needs to be honed. If glass The rod 106 is honed, and the ratio of the coating of the glass rod 106 to the diameter of the center portion will change. As a result, the optical transmission characteristics of the optical fiber manufactured from the glass rod 106 will be deteriorated. Therefore, the heating source 122 is washed through It can remove the pollution of external factors and the metal oxides attached to the heating source 122 from the heating source 122. This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling (This page) --------- Order --------- Line · Printed by the Consumer Consumption Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 517043

File:5546pii 1 .doc ^ B7 五、發明說明(q) 爲了使ά超音波淸洗裝置404來淸洗加熱源122,首先, 氫氣入口管392與氧氣入口管394會被開啓至外部。接著, 將火焰噴嘴390直接向下降,使加熱源122被浸泡在淸洗液 398中。將殘留於外管285與內管286內之任何空氣,透過氫 氣入口管392與氧氣入口管394釋放掉。隨後,外管285與 內管286被浸入及浸泡在淸洗液398中至水面頂部。接著, 超音波淸洗裝置404使用超音波震盪器396震盪超音波來淸 洗加熱源122。超音波之震動頻率爲10kHz至100kHz。 加熱源122會被超音波淸洗裝置404淸洗。用來加熱玻 璃竿之加熱源122之不銹鋼火焰噴嘴390的四周存在有金屬 氧化物。加熱源122之火焰噴嘴390四周的區域被浸泡在淸 洗液398中。具有500W輸出之超音波震盪器396,以震動頻 率爲10kHz至100kHz之超音波震盪30分鐘來淸洗加熱源 122。接著,從超音波淸洗裝置404中拿走加熱源122,並以 純水淸洗殘留於加熱源122表面上之任何淸洗液398。接著烘 乾加熱源122。 檢查外管285與內管286之頂部,以及在外管285與內 管286中不會發現金屬氧化物及外界因素污染。經由已淸洗 之加熱源122加熱處理玻璃竿106之表面。具有外界因素污 染附加之玻璃竿106的數量比已處理過之玻璃竿106的總數 的比例爲6%。 經由未被淸洗過之加熱源122加熱處理玻璃竿106之表 面,以做爲比較。在這種情況下,具有外界因素污染附加之 玻璃竿106的數量比已加熱處理過之玻璃竿1〇6的總數的比 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ------------------^—訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043File: 5546pii 1 .doc ^ B7 V. Description of the Invention (q) In order to wash the heating source 122 with the ultrasonic cleaning device 404, first, the hydrogen inlet pipe 392 and the oxygen inlet pipe 394 will be opened to the outside. Next, the flame nozzle 390 is lowered directly, and the heating source 122 is immersed in the washing liquid 398. Any air remaining in the outer pipe 285 and the inner pipe 286 is released through the hydrogen gas inlet pipe 392 and the oxygen gas inlet pipe 394. Subsequently, the outer tube 285 and the inner tube 286 are immersed and immersed in the lotion 398 to the top of the water surface. Next, the ultrasonic washing device 404 uses the ultrasonic oscillator 396 to oscillate the ultrasonic waves to wash the heating source 122. Ultrasonic vibration frequency is 10kHz to 100kHz. The heating source 122 is washed by the ultrasonic washing device 404. Metal oxides are present around the stainless steel flame nozzle 390 of the heating source 122 used to heat the glass rod. The area around the flame nozzle 390 of the heating source 122 is immersed in a tritium lotion 398. The ultrasonic oscillator 396 having an output of 500 W washes the heating source 122 by ultrasonic vibration of a vibration frequency of 10 kHz to 100 kHz for 30 minutes. Next, the heating source 122 is removed from the ultrasonic washing device 404, and any washing liquid 398 remaining on the surface of the heating source 122 is washed with pure water. The heat source 122 is then dried. The tops of the outer pipe 285 and the inner pipe 286 were checked, and no metal oxide and external factors were found to be polluted in the outer pipe 285 and the inner pipe 286. The surface of the glass rod 106 is heat-treated by the rinsed heating source 122. The ratio of the number of the glass rods 106 contaminated with external factors to the total number of the treated glass rods 106 was 6%. The surface of the glass rod 106 was heat-treated by a non-washed heating source 122 for comparison. In this case, the number of glass rods 106 attached with external factors pollution is greater than the total number of glass rods 106 that have been heat-treated. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). ) ------------------ ^ — Order --------- Line (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by Employee Consumer Cooperative 517043

File:5546piil .doc 幻 B7 五、發明說明(崎) 例爲15%。此値大於經由已淸洗過之加熱源122獲得的比例。 如上所述,加熱源122頂部上產生之金屬氧化物及外界 因素污染,可經由超音波淸洗裝置404淸洗加熱源122被移 除。經由被超音波淸洗裝置404淸洗過之加熱源122加熱玻 璃竿106,可獲得高品質之預製件107,此乃因爲較少的外界 因素附加在玻璃竿106上。 第55圖繪示的是用以拉出預製件107成一光纖之預製件 拉出裝置500的架構圖。預製件拉出裝置500包括一~^夾346 用以支撐虛擬竿342被鎔接至預製件107上;一加熱裝置348 用以加熱預製件107 ;可移動支撐架344用以供應預製件107 至加熱裝置348中;一直徑量測裝置352用以量測從預製件 1〇7拉出之光纖350的直徑;一第一塗佈裝置354用以進行光 纖35〇之第一塗佈過程;一第一矯正(curing)裝置356用以經 由一紫外線橋正此第一塗佈光纖;一第二塗佈裝置用以塗佈 光纖35〇 —第二時間;一第二矯正裝置360用以經由一紫外 線矯正此第二塗佈光纖;以及一曳引機362用以捲繞光纖 350 ° 爲了使用預製件拉出裝置500拉出預製件1〇7成一光纖 35〇,首先,虛擬竿342被鎔接至經由可移動支撐架344之卡 夾3仏支撐的預製件1〇7上。預製件107之開端接著被設定 至加熱裝置348之規定位置,然後加熱預製件1〇7。當預製件 1〇7之尖端軟化且滴落時,此滴落的預製件107之尖端會被抓 取,並穿過直徑量測裝置352被拉出。 當光纖350之直徑到達想要的直徑時,光纖35〇穿過 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -------------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 517043 F 丨丨 e:5 546piiid〇 五、發明說明(έφ 第一塗佈裝置3Μ以樹脂被第一塗佈。此第一塗佈光纖350 接著穿過第一矯正裝置356被矯正。光纖35〇接著經由第二 塗佈裝置358被第二塗佈,以及經由第二矯正裝置356被矯 正。當光纖350之拉出直徑與速度到達一規定値時,光纖 3 5 0會透過曳引機3 Μ被捲繞至一線軸上,未繪示於圖中, 經由如上所述之玻璃基礎材質第一拉出裝置900與玻 璃竿第二延長裝置111,可製造出高品質與小變動直徑之 預製件1〇7。因此,經由玻璃基礎材質第一拉出裝置900 與玻璃竿第二延長裝置111,及使用預製件拉出裝置500 製造拉出預製件107,可製造出高品質與小直徑變動之光 纖。 雖然本發明已以較佳實施例揭露如上,然其並非用以 限定本發明,任何熟習此技藝者,在不脫離本發明之精神 和範圍內,當可作各種之更動與潤飾,因此本發明之保護 範圍當視後附之申請專利範圍所界定者爲準。 -------------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製File: 5546piil.doc Magic B7 V. Description of Invention (Saki) Example is 15%. This ratio is larger than the ratio obtained through the heating source 122 which has been washed. As described above, the metal oxide generated on the top of the heating source 122 and the contamination by external factors can be removed by cleaning the heating source 122 via the ultrasonic cleaning device 404. The glass rod 106 is heated by the heating source 122 washed by the ultrasonic washing device 404, and a high-quality preform 107 can be obtained because less external factors are attached to the glass rod 106. Fig. 55 is a structural diagram of a preform pulling device 500 for pulling out the preform 107 into an optical fiber. The preform pull-out device 500 includes a clip 346 to support the virtual rod 342 to be coupled to the preform 107; a heating device 348 to heat the preform 107; and a movable support frame 344 to supply the preform 107 to In the heating device 348; a diameter measuring device 352 is used to measure the diameter of the optical fiber 350 drawn from the preform 107; a first coating device 354 is used to perform the first coating process of the optical fiber 350; A first curing device 356 is used to directly coat the first optical fiber through an ultraviolet bridge; a second coating device is used to coat the optical fiber 35 to a second time; a second correction device 360 is used to pass a The second coated optical fiber is corrected by ultraviolet rays; and a traction machine 362 is used to wind the optical fiber 350 °. In order to use the preform drawing device 500 to pull out the preform 107 into an optical fiber 35, first, the virtual rod 342 is spliced. To the preform 107 supported by the clip 3 仏 of the movable support frame 344. The start of the preform 107 is then set to a prescribed position of the heating device 348, and the preform 107 is then heated. When the tip of the preform 107 is softened and dripped, the tip of the dripped preform 107 is grasped and pulled out through the diameter measuring device 352. When the diameter of the optical fiber 350 reaches the desired diameter, the optical fiber 35 passes through this paper and applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -------------- ----- Order --------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) 517043 F 丨 丨 e: 5 546piiid〇 5. Description of the invention ((φ first coating device 3Μ It is first coated with resin. This first coated optical fiber 350 is then passed through a first correcting device 356. The optical fiber 35 is then second coated through a second coating device 358, and through a second correcting device 356 Be corrected. When the pull-out diameter and speed of the optical fiber 350 reach a specified threshold, the optical fiber 350 will be wound on a spool through the traction machine 3M, not shown in the figure, through the glass as described above The first base material pull-out device 900 and the glass rod second extension device 111 can produce high-quality and small-diameter preforms 107. Therefore, the first base material pull-out device 900 and the glass rod second The extension device 111 and the use of the preform pull-out device 500 to manufacture the pull-out preform 107 can produce high quality and small diameter change Although the present invention has been disclosed in the preferred embodiment as above, it is not intended to limit the present invention. Any person skilled in the art can make various modifications and decorations without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention. Therefore, the protection scope of the present invention shall be determined by the scope of the attached patent application. ------------------- Order --------- line (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)

Claims (1)

號專利範圍修正本Patent Scope Amendment 修正日期:民國91年7月1!日 煩請委員明示^年narlΜ3所提之 资t本有無變更實質内容是否准予修正® 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 六、申請專利範圍 1. 一種製造一光纖的方法/其中爲該光纖之一母體材質 _的玻璃竿進行複數次延長步驟,該方法包括: 設定里以加邀之一玻壤#的加熱狀況,並設定每慨延長 步驟裡該玻璃竿之延長速度,該加熱狀況及該延長速度之設 定係依據該延長步驟之每一對應進行時間; 依據執行該延長歩驟所設定之該加熱狀況與該延長速 度,加熱與延長該玻璃竿以產生一預製件;以及 經由額外加熱該預製件來拉出該預製件成一類似細線 ίί犬,以產生一光纖。 ' 2. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之方法,其中: 該加熱過程與延長過程包括一尾端拉出過程,用以縮減 該玻璃竿之一端的一直徑;以及 該尾端拉出過程依據該尾端拉出過程之該進行時間,隨 著加熱與延長過程尾端拉出該玻璃竿之該端。 3. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之方法,其中該設定情形依 據該延長過程之該進行時間,設定用以加熱該玻璃竿之一噴 燒器的一位置以及供應至該噴燒器之一氣體數量做爲該加熱 狀況。 73 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)Date of amendment: July 1, 1991! Members are kindly requested to indicate whether there is any change in the material mentioned in narlM3 in ^ year. Whether the substance of the change is allowed to be amended? Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed by the Consumer Cooperative of Consumers. 6. Scope of patent application 1. One kind of manufacturing An optical fiber method / wherein the glass rod, which is a parent material of the optical fiber, is subjected to multiple extension steps, the method includes: setting a heating condition for adding one glassy #, and setting the glass in each extension step The extension speed of the rod, the heating condition and the setting of the extension speed are based on each corresponding progress time of the extension step; according to the heating condition and the extension speed set by performing the extension step, the glass rod is heated and extended to Generating a preform; and drawing the preform into a similar thin wire by additionally heating the preform to produce an optical fiber. '2. The method as described in item 1 of the scope of patent application, wherein: the heating process and the extension process include a tail end drawing process to reduce a diameter of one end of the glass rod; and the tail end drawing process According to the progress time of the tail end drawing process, the tail end of the glass rod is drawn out with the heating and extending process. 3. The method as described in item 1 of the scope of patent application, wherein the setting situation is to set a position for heating one of the burners of the glass rod and the supply of the burner according to the progress time of the extension process. An amount of gas is used as the heating condition. 73 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Γ 517043 A8 5546pir2/013 B8 爲第88119203號專利範圍修正本 § 修正曰期:民國91年7月II日 六、申請專利範圍 4. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之方法,其中該設定情形依 據該延長過程之該進行時間,設定用以支撐該玻璃竿之一卡 夾的一移動速度做爲該延長速度。 5. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之方法,其中被尾端拉出之 該玻璃竿的一端,其直徑被縮減,而該設定情形爲: 依據沿著該玻璃竿之軸方向之複數個位置中之一直徑, 以及經由該延長過程沿著該玻璃竿之軸方向之該玻璃竿的一 長度變化,偵測被尾端拉出之該玻璃竿之一尾端拉出區域的 厂位置;以及 、 依據該尾端拉出區域之該位置,設定經由一火焰硏磨之 該玻璃竿的一硏磨範圍,並依據該尾端拉出區域之一直徑, 設定該火焰之一加熱功率狀況, 以及該加熱與延長過程經由該加熱功率狀況之該火焰, 硏磨該玻璃竿之該硏磨範圍。 6.如_申請專利範圍第1項所述之方法,宜由: 該加熱與延長過程具有: 預加熱該玻璃竿直到該玻璃竿之規定區域軟化爲止;以 及 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -一5J ί. 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 517043 5546pir2/013 B8 爲第88119203號專利範圍修正本 修正曰期:民國91年7月11日 六、申請專利範圍 Λ端ίΐ出該規定區域,用以縮減該規定區域之一直徑, 並用以經由額外加熱與延長該規定區域,製作該玻璃竿之一 上山 価。 7. 如申請專利範圍第6項所述之方法,其中該尾端拉出過 程更包括第二加熱過程,用以經由一火焰加熱一區域,比起 該規定區域之一中心,其大多朝著該玻璃竿之一中間面的方 向,該火焰之濃度小於該預加熱過程之該火焰的濃度。 8. ·—種製造一預製件的方法,其中爲光纖之母體材質的 玻璃竽進行複邀次延是步驟,包括:、 設定用以加熱之一玻璃竿的加熱狀況,並設定每個延長, 步驟_裡該玻璃竿之延長速度,該加熱狀況及該延長速度之設 定係依據該延長步驟之每一對應進行時間; 依據執行該延長步驟所設定之該加熱狀況與該延長速 度,加熱與延長該玻璃竿以產生一預製件。 9·如申請專利範圍第8項所述之方法,其中: 該加熱過程與延長過程包括一尾端拉出過程,用以縮減 該玻璃竿之一端的一直徑;以及 該尾端拉出過程依據該尾端拉出過程之該進行時間,隨 75 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 517043 5546pir2/013 爲第88119203號專利範圍修正本 A8 B8 C8 D8 修正日期:民國91年7月1丨曰 六、申請專利範圍 著加熱與延長過程尾端拉出該玻璃竿之該端。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ίο.如申請專利範圍第&項所述之方法,其中被尾端拉出 之該玻璃竿的一端,其直徑被縮減,而該設定情形爲: 依據沿著該玻璃竿之軸方向之複數個位置中之一直徑, 以及經由該延長過程沿著該玻璃竿之軸方向之該玻璃竿的一 長度變化,偵測被尾端拉出之該玻璃竿之一尾端拉出區域的 一位置;以及 . 依據該尾端拉出區域之該位置,設定經由一火焰硏磨之 該玻璃竿的一硏磨範圍,並依據該尾端拉出區域之一直徑, 設定該火焰之一加熱功率狀況, 以及該加熱與延長過程經由該加熱功率狀況之該火焰, 硏磨該玻璃竿之該硏磨範圍。 11.如申請專利節圍第纟項堑述之方法,其中: 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 預加熱該玻璃竿直到該玻璃竿之一規定區域軟化爲止; 以及 尾端拉出該規定區域,用以縮減該規定區域之一直徑, 並用以經由額外加熱與延長該規定區域,製作該玻璃竿之一 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 517043 5546pir2/013 B8 爲第剛觸3號專利範圍修正本 修正日期:民國91年7月丨/日 六、請專利範圍 端。 12·如申請專利範圍第11項所述之方法,其中該尾端拉出 過程更包括第二加熱過程,用以經由一火焰加熱一區域,比 起該規定區域之一中心,其大多朝著該玻璃竿之一中間面的 方向,該火焰之濃度小於該預加熱過程之該火焰的濃度。 U·—種製造一預製件的裝置,其爲一光纖之一母體材質, 包括: 一加熱源,用以加熱一玻璃竿,其爲該預製件之一母體 材質; 、 ―延長單元,用以延長該玻璃竿; 一量測裝置,用以量測該玻璃竿之一延長過程之複數個 進行時間;以及 一控制單元,用以依據經由該量測裝置量測到之該延長 過程之複數個進行時間,控制該加熱源之一加熱狀況與該延 長單元之一延長速度。 77 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) •Ί訂· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製Γ 517043 A8 5546pir2 / 013 B8 is the amendment to the scope of patent No. 88119203 § Date of amendment: July II, 1991 6. Application for patent scope 4. The method described in item 1 of the scope of patent application, where the setting situation According to the progress time of the extension process, a moving speed for supporting a clip of the glass rod is set as the extension speed. 5. The method as described in item 1 of the scope of patent application, wherein the diameter of one end of the glass rod pulled out by the tail end is reduced, and the setting situation is: according to a plurality of directions along the axis of the glass rod A diameter of one of the positions, and a change in the length of the glass rod along the axis of the glass rod through the extension process, detecting the factory position of the area where one end of the glass rod is pulled out by the end; And, setting a honing range of the glass rod through a flame honing according to the position of the tail end drawing area, and setting a heating power condition of the flame according to a diameter of the tail drawing area, And the heating and extension process hones the honing range of the glass rod through the flame of the heating power condition. 6. The method described in item 1 of the scope of the patent application should be: The heating and extension process has: Preheating the glass rod until the specified area of the glass rod is softened; and (Please read the precautions on the back before (Fill in this page)-5J ί. Printed by the Employees 'Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs This paper is printed to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Printed by the Employees' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 517043 5546pir2 / 013 B8 is the amendment to the scope of patent No. 88119203. The date of amendment: July 11, 1991. 6. The scope of application for patent application Λ end of the prescribed area is used to reduce the diameter of one of the prescribed areas and used for additional heating. With the extension of the prescribed area, make one of the glass poles uphill. 7. The method as described in item 6 of the scope of patent application, wherein the tail end drawing process further includes a second heating process for heating an area via a flame, which is mostly directed toward a center of the prescribed area. In the direction of a middle surface of the glass rod, the concentration of the flame is less than the concentration of the flame in the pre-heating process. 8. A method of manufacturing a prefabricated part, in which the invitation of the glass fiber material of the optical fiber is performed as a second extension, including :, setting a heating condition for heating a glass rod, and setting each extension, In the step_, the extension speed of the glass rod, the heating condition and the extension speed are set according to each corresponding time of the extension step; according to the heating condition and the extension speed set in the execution of the extension step, heating and extension The glass rod is used to produce a preform. 9. The method according to item 8 of the scope of patent application, wherein: the heating process and the extension process include a tail end drawing process to reduce a diameter of one end of the glass rod; and the tail end drawing process basis The time of the tail end pull-out process, with 75 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page)-This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 517043 5546pir2 / 013 Revised A8 B8 C8 D8 for the scope of patent No. 88119203 Date of amendment: July 1, 1991 Republic of China VI. The scope of patent application is heating and extending the end of the glass rod. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) ίο. As described in the & patent application method, wherein the diameter of one end of the glass rod pulled out by the tail end is reduced, and the setting situation Is: based on the diameter of one of the plurality of positions along the axis of the glass rod, and a change in the length of the glass rod along the axis of the glass rod through the extension process, detecting the A position of the tail end pull-out area of the glass rod; and, according to the position of the tail end pull-out area, setting a honing range of the glass rod through a flame honing, and pulling out according to the tail end A diameter of a region, a heating power condition of the flame is set, and the heating range of the glass rod is honed through the flame during the heating and elongation process. 11. The method described in item (2) of the patent application section, wherein: the consumer cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs prints and preheats the glass rod until one of the specified areas of the glass rod is softened; and the end is pulled out of the regulation Area to reduce the diameter of one of the prescribed areas, and to make one of the glass rods by additional heating and extension of the prescribed area. The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 517043 5546pir2 / 013 B8 is the amendment to the scope of patent No. 3 just touched. The date of amendment: July 丨 / 91, Republic of China on 6th, please request the scope of patent. 12. The method as described in item 11 of the scope of patent application, wherein the tail-end drawing-out process further includes a second heating process for heating an area through a flame, which is mostly directed toward a center of the prescribed area. In the direction of a middle surface of the glass rod, the concentration of the flame is less than the concentration of the flame in the pre-heating process. U · —A device for manufacturing a preform, which is a parent material of an optical fiber, including: a heating source for heating a glass rod, which is a parent material of the preform; and, an extension unit for Extending the glass rod; a measuring device for measuring a plurality of progress times of an extension process of the glass rod; and a control unit for measuring the plurality of extension processes measured by the measuring device The progress time controls the heating condition of one of the heating sources and the extension speed of one of the extension units. 77 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) • Customized • Printed by the Employees ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs
TW88119203A 1998-11-05 1999-12-10 Optical fiber manufacture method, preform manufacture method, and preform manufacture apparatus TW517043B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP31457498A JP3494905B2 (en) 1998-11-05 1998-11-05 A method for obtaining an optical fiber preform without surface irregularities
JP31456498 1998-11-05
JP31455398A JP3430038B2 (en) 1998-11-05 1998-11-05 End drawing method of preform for optical fiber and apparatus used for the method
JP31585698 1998-11-06
JP10315849A JP3112893B2 (en) 1998-11-06 1998-11-06 Glass base material stretching method

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW517043B true TW517043B (en) 2003-01-11

Family

ID=27808850

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW88119203A TW517043B (en) 1998-11-05 1999-12-10 Optical fiber manufacture method, preform manufacture method, and preform manufacture apparatus

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (1) TW517043B (en)

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP0999189B1 (en) Process and apparatus for drawing a preform and for drawing an optical fibre from the drawn preform
EP1035080B1 (en) Method and apparatus for drawing a glass rod from a preform for optical fiibres
CN101031516B (en) Process and device for manufacturing glass sheet
WO2013033063A1 (en) Apparatus and method for forming glass sheets
EP2166271A2 (en) Hydrogen supply equipment
EP2145864A2 (en) Quartz glass manufacturing method and quartz glass manufacturing apparatus
TW517043B (en) Optical fiber manufacture method, preform manufacture method, and preform manufacture apparatus
JP4395224B2 (en) Optical fiber manufacturing method, preform manufacturing method, and preform manufacturing apparatus
KR20200089229A (en) Automated large outside diameter preform tipping process and resulting glass preforms
TW548247B (en) Optical fiber manufacture method, preform manufacture method, and preform manufacture apparatus
TW548250B (en) Optical fiber manufacture method, preform manufacture method, and preform manufacture apparatus
TW548249B (en) Optical fiber manufacture method, preform manufacture method, and preform manufacture apparatus
TW200533614A (en) Method and quipment for sintering porous glass base material
CN108698902A (en) Method for sheet glass separation
CN114804612A (en) Method and apparatus for elongating glass base material
JP5380018B2 (en) Optical fiber preform manufacturing method
US7302814B2 (en) Apparatus for preventing deflection of substrate tube
KR100251774B1 (en) Method of over-cladding optical fiber preform and drawing optical fiber
TW202206381A (en) Apparatus and method to form glass with improved thickness profile
TW202330380A (en) Method of treating a glass ribbon and apparatus therefor
KR20030049018A (en) Chemical Preheating Method for Increasing Usable Length of Preform and Apparatus therefor
JP2001287922A (en) Method for producing optical fiber preform
JP2003300749A (en) Glass preform and method for fabricating glass preform

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
GD4A Issue of patent certificate for granted invention patent
MM4A Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees